Home

NEC Express5800 User's Manual

image

Contents

1. AEE A CAUTION BUNOT ER eB Fl A EREHE AINOAT CS PRAET escam PST HESS BHCHR HERE ZEER EZERA AEE Fede zeae cima BEARER FT A CHER gt MERIAL EAH ANG LAME SRR UBER THE gt H
2. o EE m FATE TC AIURRI um TORRES SERE m Eo LEA Pin BREA BAR BEE ME m NEC Precautions for Use 1 17
3. E LEE Pe N ED E fet k BH H H HM NH NH EH NH EH NH NH H 74a a bm ES gt vB ER ay m Es nl 1 16 Precautions for Use 4a CAUTION A KERR m JK EEN Ld E gt LT m 2j 825 S Uo BH ES HIT m m PIKK
4. BIETER BR m ANEUET TEETH SR dS e IRE PERIERE RUDRA Bei PAS SGD ike iva ERAS BG TERRAE KSEE EAE SEEDS TIGER Precautions for Use 1 19 BARA as ES SR WARNING SS EIA 19 Tic
5. gt 4 Pe WHGETT o XUEEA T gt OF OS SPURS TE CHEERS TNR nl TER HTC Hl ETC nli PAPE A OIC BeOS CAE ea RD EGE Re EGR gt BORIEEUCERT esf CLE RS FBR
6. m RRA EE a FAEERE Jis DRE Pen TERA SR EE TESI IS gx ERE SUR METRE AS ERE EBE SWR MEET SEIRE gt POWER gt 3 BURKE AS BIE SEG Pr PAR E Hel A GEB Se LEO CR gt SCTE TR REBEL FERNER CAUTION ur NA ELEAF EY o ee gt LPS eT KITE EASE gt THEN gt aE SEARA TINE Precautions for Use 1 15 5 FD FU 2 FR es WARNING
7. iad Zep SY aR Be RSE o EIR SREY f NBER FS aH o pom A CAUTION dd E E OBE FH AERE FRE AK ee n UU T THIS EUR ETATS FAM EERIUK 6 n HI E E it GE FE EU ECD o AR Ae AS BT BA gt EE KE gt ETADESERSHUK SE o SESE ASHE EHS FE EE niil ER Ok CA zr HR ES I En i nili hn T H TH x ks AC SP BB amp gt amp 14 76 ft 125YV 10A SJT NEE Hate eS VR TEE ER
8. 3 ABA AE TAR E iah H T 1 20 Precautions for Use CAUTION LL oH FS T ENK SERTSSEDRSTRER RIS MEDI T EERE AEE EK ABEJE BU ZCRRUREERBU ES Ce eT er E TERES Ed URS R7 2 v T EER MCU A TER ol o oee o Precautions for Use 1 21 DISPOSAL OF E
9. x O o o fe o is Goo o 24059 09000 000 00000000 0000 ooo 00000000 90 900 00000000 00000 000 O09009009 OO oo0 oooooGo OU 000 09900990 00 loo 00000000 OO O00 00000000 o 8 ooo 0000900 OO O00 00000000 o 900 00000900 OO 900 09000090 o opo 00900900 00 O o la o e a o is O 0000 o 8 o o o O o o of 0090902020909 00000000 o 00000000 OO 000090 c OO Qooooo9 00 000000000 o o o lo lo o o 0 lo i UX 4 t hy ISR Zi 2d Is a o Rack model 2 16 General Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Power supply units Power supply units supply DC power to the server Cooling fan unit 2 Lock springs A lock spring prevents a power supply cord from disconnected from this device AC inlets A power cord is connected to this socket Power supply unit LEDs A power supply unit LED blinks in green when AC power is supplied via a power cord When the server is powered on the LED illuminates in green see page 2 27 Cooling fan LEDs A cooling fan LED illuminates in green while a cooling fan unit is working normally If th
10. Timestamp Event 1 11 04 3 06 54 AM PowerSupply Recovery Power Supply Failure dete 1 11 04 3 06 48 AM PowerSupply Error Power Supply Failure detected 1 11 04 12 49 57 AM Power Supply Recovery Power Supply Failure dete 1 11 04 12 49 51 AM Power Supply Error Power Supply Failure detected 4 1 i Infc 14 nfor 1 10 04 11 13 51 PM System Boot Initiated Information Initiated by pow nation Record ID 1788h Timestamp 1 10 04 11 14 10 PM Event OS Boot Information C boot completed Dump 88170242 87004041 0004 1FA3 6F418FFF The upper pane shows a list of system event logs while the lower pane shows details of the entry selected in the list By clicking the reloading 1con 92 you can reload the SEL information from the BMC and display the latest information Clearing the SEL information By clicking the SEL clear icon i you can clear the SEL information on the BMC As a message for confirmation appears click Yes if it is OK to clear the information If you click No the SEL information will not be cleared 4 60 System Configuration Sensor Data Record SDR Network Status Host information LED HA Status m administrator jl 9 Ready Primary When you click the icon to start up sensor device information SDR Eion the control panel the SDR information is collected from the BMC and shown on the sensor devic
11. ese AUR CI ie ST IRF A CAUTION A A op HE A nili q EN B N T d D 1 18 Precautions for Use CAUTION gt gt Jes a PRL KS FIRST BI nli FERES PREIS I B PHA UVR LA LEER EE EE o Bul H m 5 EAL EBT PE Rta AT A I8 SA RRAK efi EE TM A CAUTION aime A EMIS BETJBJEEIUTRUESSEE A if
12. ABMCFW bhx Jul 9 2004 2 55 33 PM Platform Information PIA Sensor Data Re ord SDR Or Applet KYM firmware ll 01 10 00 11 05 2a 01 01 00 06 03 29 NOOOR PIA0101 hex Jul 9 2004 2 55 35 PM gng0006 bin Jul 9 2004 2 55 37 PM I ABMC RBF Jul 9 2004 2 55 31 PM CHECK Only those selected here will be written in Items with no check box selected will not be written in even if files have been loaded IMPORTANT If you update both SDR and PIA make sure to write in simultaneously If writing 1s done twice the first writing will not take effect Writing update data into the BMC When you click the icon for writing update the writing the update data into the BMC begins New RevisionUpdat dstatus File name Timestamp Platform Information PIA sensor Dat DR Applet 00 08 01 10 00 11 0f 21 01 01 00 06 ABMCFW bhx Jul 9 2004 2 55 33 PM PIAO101 hex Jul 9 2004 2 55 35 PM gngoG06 bin Jui 9 2004 2 55 37 PM KYM firmware 05 2a 03 29 SOs ABMC RBF Jul 9 2004 2 55 31 PM 4 78 System Configuration As shown below the window showing writing process appears for each update target Update is starting 0 Update Pre process is running 0 If any error is detected during the writing process an error message is displayed and the process terminates End of writin
13. For elo press F1 Gil femal Wares il Abnorm General of SCSI slot 5 34 Installing and Using Utilities 4 Confirmation of mirror status To check the redundancy status of the failed mirror disk open Mirror screen under ft On this screen you can check the redundancy status of the mirror and the status of the mirrored hard disks 6 Ge t yow Teds teb E J amp j 41 ala a m DE Em Nj For Help press Fl Biod Warning Ml irons Mirror IMPORTANT The mirroring redundancy status will change depending on the status of the two hard disks that make up a mirror as follows Status of hard disk 1 Status of hard disk 2 Status of mirror volume Duplex Duplex Normal Simplex Warning Others Warning Simplex Duplex Warning Simplex Warning Others Warning Others Duplex Warning Simplex Warning Others No status is shown TIPS Unless the hard disks make up a mirror the Mirror Disk screen does not show any information Installing and Using Utilities 5 35 IMPORTANT The Mirror Disk screen shows a pair of two hard disks as a mirror Disk pairs are shown in the same manner even if a few volumes are created within a single disk or one volume spans a few disks span volume E A few volumes are created within a single disk 41 1 41 2 a freee renee ms 41 4 41 5 t o pe eh m em 3 8i i lol li el
14. Item Description Time of last run Time and date of the last diagnostics execution Message Message from the diagnostics result Test No Test number from the diagnostics result The following buttons are displayed for PCI Module Item Description MTBF Info Displays MTBF information Clear Clears the MTBF information of the PCI module Up Starts the PCI module The CPU module of the same module must be stopped when starting the PCI module When the CPU module of the same module is running stop the CPU module and then start it after starting the PCI module Down Stops the PCI module Depending on a module state a screen will go off temporarily Also USB devices such as a keyboard and a mouse may not be available for a few minutes However a system continues operating You cannot stop the module when the FT status LED is not illuminating green when the server is not duplicated Diagnose Executes diagnostics of the CPU module on the same module as the PCI module To perform diagnostics both CPU and PCI modules on the module needs to be stopped 1 The execution of each button may take a few minutes Wait for a while to update the display and check the module status 2 These operations cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating firmware Wait until such processing is finished to perform the operations in the table Installing and Using Utilities 5 45 SCSI
15. Open Cancel Specify an update data file When you click Open after specifying the file loading of the file begins Wait for file loading to complete TIPS You can update in a batch If there are more than one update targets all the information of the update targets must be loaded You can select more than one file to be loaded at the same time Confirming revision When loading data files completes information on current revisions loaded revisions and file data file names and time stamps appears on the window Check the information carefully Firmware Update wal Target Current Revisid i BMC firmware 00 08 Platform Information PIA 01 10 atdStatus File name Timestamp ABMCFW bhx Jul 9 2004 2 55 33 PM PIAO101 hex Jul 9 2004 2 55 35 PM o 3ta Record SDR gng0006 bin Jul 9 2004 2 55 37 PM ABMC RBF jul 9 2004 2 55 31 PM 00 11 Applet KVM firmware j 05 2a OOOD System Configuration 4 77 CHECK Check each revision carefully because downgrading is possible as well If you click the icon for clearing update data A all loaded data will be discarded When you click Cancel the update window will be closed without saving any loaded data Selecting what to be upgraded Select check boxes of update targets Target visi iUpdatematus File name Timestamp BMC firmware Current Revisior New Re
16. m Make sure to provide the same hardware configuration on both groups m Use the same slots and sockets on both groups m Do not install those devices having different specifications performance or features m Before removing the setscrews from the CPU IO modules place the desired module off line using the Server Maintenance Utility or the NEC ESMPRO Manager System Upgrade 8 5 3 5 INCH HARD DISK DRIVE The 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay in front of the server contains six slots in which hard disks with the SCA2 interface are installed IMPORTANT m Do not use any hard disks that are not authorized by NEC Installing a third party hard disk may cause a failure of the server as well as the hard disk Purchase hard disks of the same model in pair Contact your sales agent for hard disk drives optimum for your server TIPS m The primary CPU IO module is determined by the order of connecting power cords see Chapter3 The 320Fa L model is used in the example quoted here However steps you should take are the same for other models You can install 25 4mm 1 inch high hard disk drives to six 3 5 inch hard disk drive bays on the server 3 5 imch hard disk drive bays have labels with slot number The hard disk drives installed on the slot 0 1 and 2 are mirrored with the slot 3 4 and 5 respectively The OS is installed on the mirror volumes that consist of the hard disks in the slot 0 and 3 TTS gt c S
17. The Module got power down in the middle of handling failure The module was powered off while troubleshooting an error The server is operating normally The Module or the CPU module detected the state change in the middle of handling failure of the CPU module so stopped the action The processing was stopped because a change in the CPU module state was detected while troubleshooting a CPU error The Module BIOS CPU state did not become CPU stop reset waiting The CPU state of BIOS did not become CPU stop reset waiting If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The Module broke down The IO module failed There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The serial number of the Module was invalid The serial number of the module is invalid If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent Base address reading error PCI Config Base address reading error PCI Config The system abnormality of the Module was detected Abnormality in the module was detected There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The POST timeout occurred in the Module A POST timeout occurred in the module The POST error occurred in the Module A POST error occurred in the
18. um zs Z Z SCSI electronics ES SCSI slot m m E m Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility Support Not support JL RTI Installing and Using Utilities 5 49 The maintenance operations in the table cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating firmware Wait until such processing is finished to perform the operations in the table The table below shows the component specific maintenance functions executable from NEC ESMPRO Dum Dump acquisition c t Se En during system Board switch omponen q operation R L R L R L CPU module N N N N N R Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager L Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility vV Support Not support Component Change of primary SCSI bus R L SCSI bus y R Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager L Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility v Support Not support Component BMC firmware update R L BMC N y R Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager L Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility vV Support
19. 1 Click Start Administrative Tools Computer Management The Computer Management window appears Click Disk Management under Storage in the console tree lt If you are using the tower model gt Unlock the front door lock with the security key and open the front door lt If you are using the rack model gt Unlock the front bezel with the security key and detach it Identify the slot to which you want to install the hard disk Install a hard disk in an empty slot in the group starting from the lower slot In the order of slot 0 slot 3 slot 1 slot 4 slot 2 and slot 5 Hold the handle of the dummy tray to remove the tray IMPORTANT Keep and store the dummy tray with care Unlock the hard disk to be added System Upgrade 8 7 7 Firmly hold the handle of the hard disk to install and insert the hard disk into the slot TIPS m Insert the disk until the lever hook touches the server frame W Check the orientation of lever Insert the hard disk with the lever unlocked 8 Slowly close the lever When the lever is locked you will hear a click sound IMPORTANT Be careful not to pinch your finger s between the lever and handle TIPS Check the hook of the lever is engaged with the frame 9 Connect the power cord 10 Press the POWER switch to power on 11 If you are using the tower model Close the front door and lock it with the security key lt If
20. 7 30 Troubleshooting When incorporating the module again it has been disconnected the network is not duplexed O Has the module been completely disconnected When you disconnected the module using NEC ESMPRO and tried to incorporate it again the network may not be duplexed if the module is not completely disconnected Make sure that the module is completely disconnected by confirming that the FT LED is turned off and the module is powered off and then incorporate the module If incorporating the module does not start for a few minutes try to incorporate it again When turning on the DC power after the module has been implemented ESMALERT HAS C00706A6 The driver failed to bind the Module is notified O After the module is implemented if the timing to turn on the DC power is too early this message may be displayed Right after implementing the module hardware is initialized When the DC power is turned on before the initialization process completes this message may be displayed but there is not any problem After that if the DC power of the module is not automatically turned on press the DC button again to turn on the DC power The network is not duplexed Ifthe network is not duplexed redundancy of the system is incomplete and the status LED indicator does not illuminate green Follow the steps below to check the network configuration Procedure 1 Run ifconfig a grep eth If
21. NvRAM access error An access to the nonvolatile memory NvRAM is not acceptable Hard disk access error The hard disk is not connected or it is failed Check whether the hard disk is correctly connected There is no device specific This message is displayed when NEC information on motherboard EXPRESSBUILDER cannot find device Restore the backup information or specific information such as when write the information using replacing a motherboard System Information Management Maintenance personnel write information in offline maintenance utility using offline maintenance utility Only maintenance personnel can operate this Are you going to run offline maintenance utility 7 36 Troubleshooting Problems with NEC ESMPRO NEC ESMPRO Agent See Chapter 5 NEC ESMPRO Manager See Chapter 5 See also online document in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM for troubleshooting and other supplementary information Troubleshooting 7 37 COLLECTION OF TROUBLE LOGS In the event of trouble you can get information in the procedures described below IMPORTANT m You can perform the procedures described below only when you are asked by your maintenance personnel to get trouble logs m When the system restarts after the trouble it may show a message that there is a shortage of virtual memory However continue the system startup If you reset and restart the system you cannot get correct information Collectio
22. Firmware can be updated from an old version to a new version only It cannot be updated if its version number is equal to or smaller than the one of both modules of the system whose firmware you want to update Cancel Cancels firmware update Key Operations Arrow keys Use the up or down arrow key T or to move up or down the selection of the tree item when the focus is on the tree view For items with or use the left or right arrow key or to expand or close the tree Space key ec 99 When the focus is on the tree view use the space key to expand or close items with or on the tree When the focus is on the component screen use the space key to check a radio button Tab key When the focus is on the tree view use the Tab key to move to the Exit button When the focus is on the component screen use the Tab key to move to the next selection item Enter key When the focus is on the tree view use the Enter key to display the component screen of a component 5 48 Installing and Using Utilities Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series The server maintenance can be done in two ways one is to use NEC ESMPRO Manager for remote maintenance and the other is to use the NEC ESMPRO Agent Server Maintenance Utility on the server for local maintenance TIPS W How to start NEC ESMPRO Agent Server Maintenance Utility that is installed on NEC Express5800 ft seri
23. Starting the module causes the firmware to be updated automatically However if the Enable automatic firmware update property is disabled the module is started but the firmware will not be updated In such a case perform the following operations before starting the module 1 Click the Firmware Update button in the Update screen for the target component Select a method For updating 2 In the Firmware Update dialog box select Copy online BIOS image to Offline as a method for updating and click Execute C Specify the file path to update Type the location of the Firmware v Cancel Help IMPORTANT A message prompting you to reconstruct the tree of Data Viewer you are updating may appear In such a case click Yes CHECK When stopping IO module check that the status of Ethernet is Duplex on NEC ESMPRO Manager Do not stop the IO module especially when LAN is connected only to the IO module on that side Installing and Using Utilities 5 63 Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility 1 Enable Automatic module start and Automatic firmware update See Setup of System Operation in this chapter for the procedure to enable Store the image data of the firmware for update in the NEC Express5800 ft series Save it in the etc directory under the name BIOS ROM On the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility select the target component
24. System Serial Number Displays the system information Chassis Part Number Displays the chassis information Chassis Serial Number Displays the chassis information BMC Device ID Displays the BMC information BMC Device Revision Displays the BMC information 4 22 System Configuration Option Parameter Description BMC Firmware Revision Displays the BMC information SDR Revision Displays the revision of SDR sensor device information PIA Revision Displays the PIA plat form information revision Module 0 BMC MAC Address Displays the BMC MAC address of CPU IO module 0 Module 1 BMC MAC Address Displays the BMC MAC address of CPU IO module 1 Factory set MAC address information is shown only when the N8815 001 001A ft Remote Management Card is installed Console Redirection Select Console Redirection on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the following screen Fi Help l Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Ew Exit lt SelectMenu EnterSelect p Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description BIOS Redirection Disabled Enable or disable Console Redirection By enabling Port Enabled this option you can remotely control behavior during POST Baud Rate 9600 Select a port rate used for the interface w
25. There was a DMA error Legacy device error occurred There was a legacy device error Surprise remove occurred Supprise removal occurred There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent 7 16 Troubleshooting Message Meaning Action CRC error occurred on the FT Link There was a CRC error in FT Link There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent Accessing to shared memory with the BIOS failed Failed to access the memory shared with BIOS If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent MTBF is below the threshold The MTBF of the module is lower than the threshold There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent There is a difference between the BIOS version The BIOS version of the module 0 and that of module 1 are different If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the BIOS environment Contact your sales agent Updating MTBF information failed Failed to update the MTBF information There may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent IPMI driver does not start The IPMI driver is not running The driver failed to refer the object of IPMI driver Failed to refer to the IPMI driver object If the message is recorded
26. 9 lt Return Command 2 Bring Up System Disk Which scsi SLOT 0 5 2 lt lt lt Add the disk in Slot2 gt gt gt Command Action 1 Bring Down System Disk 2 Bring Up System Disk 3 Status System Disks 9 lt Return Command 2 Bring Up System Disk Which scsi SLOT 0 5 5 lt lt lt Add the disk in Slot5 gt gt gt Command Action 1 Bring Down System Disk 2 Bring Up System Disk 3 Status System Disks 9 lt Return Command 3 lt lt lt Confirmthat the disks are added to the system gt gt gt SCSI DISK STATUS SYSTEM slot name use serial path 0 hada 2 V3W1N8RA0050B5CL0399 hicOtOlOACT h7c0t0O10HOT 1 2 hadc 0 V3W45ZVA0050B5CL0707 h1c0t210ACT h7c0t210HOT 3 hadb 2 V3WIRK5A0050B5CK040D h2c0t310ACT h8c0t310HOT 4 5 hadd 0 V3W1D30A0050B6120DED h2c0t510ACT h8c0t510HOT System Upgrade 8 11 Command Action 1 Bring Down System Disk 2 Bring Up System Disk 3 Status System Disks 9 lt Return Command 9 Example of RAID configuration Command Action 1 gt RAID 2 gt SCSI 9 Quit Command 1 Command Action 1 New Disks Remove Half Disk Repair Disk Remove Full Disks Status Raid Status All Disks lt Return ODO BF C N Command 1 New Disks Which scsi SLOT 1 2 4 5 2 1 Making the disk partition table SLOT 2 SIZE 69809 MB How many partitions 1 12 4 2 Input the SIZE of partition 1
27. 9034 DIMM is faulty Replace the DIMM If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 903A DIMM is faulty Replace the DIMM If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9040 9047 CPU is faulty ID 0 7 Replace the CPU 9050 9055 DIMM is faulty ID 0 5 Replace the DIMM If this does not help replace the CPU IO module Troubleshooting 7 11 On screen error message Cause Action 9058 905F This CPU IO module detected the mismatch of CPUID between the CPU IO modules CPU configuration may be different between the CPU IO modules Replace the CPU If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9062 9063 CPU IO module or ft Remote If turning AC power off and on Management Card option is does not help replace the faulty CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option 9065 One or both the CPU IO There are some error messages modules have a problem in addition to this error code Check the other error message 9071 9072 Water cooling kit has leaked Replace the water cooling kit out If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9080 908F This CPU IO module failed to When the system is running in 9080 9085 get the information from the duplex mode it is no 9087 908F another CPU IO module problem If the system cannot be running in the duplex mode due to continuous this error replace the CPU IO module If this does not h
28. Enable Automatic module start If Enable is selected for this item modules will be put into the duplex mode automatically when mounting both modules and restarting the system If Disable is selected the modules will not be in the duplex mode The default value is Enable Installing and Using Utilities 5 69 Settings can be made in the System Configuration window of Server Maintenance Utility The table below shows the potential cases in which the system operation setup is changed Contact your maintenance personnel for the change of the system operation setup Setting change will take effect after system reboot However the utility does not indicate that reboot is required The system operation settings cannot be made while collecting dump or updating firmware Wait until such processing is finished to make the settings Component Quick dump um firmware Automatic module start Remote Local Remote Local Remote Local Whole Executable if Executable if the Executable if the system the system is system is system is operating operating operating When dump is When firmware is When firmware is acquired by updated manually started manually at using the at insertion of insertion of new dump function new module module normally installed in OS at occurrence of system fault Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on
29. Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility Installing and Using Utilities 5 67 Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility 1 Onthe main window of the Server Maintenance Utility select the target component The screen of the target component appears Check the current status of the target CPU module with the LEDs Select a dump acquisition method on the CPU module screen and select Harvest A certain time is required for the dump acquisition The dump is stored to the system defined location on the server The result of the dump acquisition can be registered in the syslog 4 Start the component Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility Main window CPU Module screen 5 68 Installing and Using Utilities Setup of System Operation The following properties can be set as the operation setup of the whole system Quick dump that is harvested at the same time of reboot If Enable is selected for this item dump is collected as the system reboots when an error occurs in the system When Disable is selected dump is collected by the OS standard dump function The default value is Enable Automatic firmware update If Enable is selected for this item the BIOS of the new CPU module is updated to the BIOS of the existing CPU module to match with each other If Disable is selected the BIOS of the new CPU module is not updated automatically The default value is
30. The screen of the target component appears Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs If the component is running stop the component Select Update of Firmware The Firmware Update screen appears Select Specify the file path to update type etc BIOS ROM as the file path and then select Execute The firmware update will be performed After the firmware update has completed the target component automatically starts and the other stops IMPORTANT If Automatic firmware update is disabled the target component will not start and the firmware update will not complete In such case perform the firmware update again after enabling Automatic firmware update The other component will start automatically and the firmware will be updated automatically IMPORTANT If Automatic module start is disabled the target component will not start automatically In such case start the component manually The firmware will be updated automatically When BIOS of one CPU module is updated select Switch in Board Switch The updated module will be started and the module currently running will be stopped Use Board Switch only when updating firmware While switching boards the keyboard and the mouse will be unavailable for few minutes If the modules were not switched due to the system state you can continue to the next step by selecting Down in CPU Module Up Down of
31. When you select Advanced Chipset Control in the Advanced menu the following screen appears Pho enix BIOS Setup Utility Advanced Advan ced Chips et Control Item Specifx Help Determines thea cto n of WakeOn PME Drabled fhe syst em wh enaLAN OS Debug DE abled wake up event occ urs Fl Help TL Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults Ex Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save an d Exit Refer to the table below for information on options Option Parameter Description Wake on LAN Disabled Select whether or not to enable the Enabled remote power on function via the LAN connector on motherboard Wake On PME Disabled Select whether or not to enable the Enabled remote power on function via the PCI LAN card OS Debug Disabled Select whether or not to enable the Enabled OS Debug mode Typically select Disable Factory set 4 18 System Configuration Security Move the cursor onto Security to display the Security menu Main Advanced Server Set Supervisor Password Enter Select Set Supervisor Password or Set User Password and press Enter to display the following pop up screen The screen below shows when Set Supervisor Password is selected Set a password on this pop up screen Enter a password of up to seven alphanumeric characters and symbols from the keyboard Advanced Set Supervisur Pansword Enter IMPORTANT m User p
32. lt Menu to check Server AC LINK Power On gt Make sure the POWER switch on the power unit is on O Did you press the POWER switch Press the POWER switch on the front of the NEC Express5800 ft series to turn on the power the POWER LED lights O Did you install the CPU IO module properly Check if the CPU IO module is properly installed in the server Secure the CPU IO module with screw located on the module removable handle The server cannot be powered on unless it is screwed completely O Isthe FAULT LES of the CPU IO module on Remove and reinsert the CPU IO module and restart the server 7 24 Troubleshooting Fail to power off the server Ll Is the POWER switch enabled Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility lt Menu to check Security Switch Inhibit Enabled gt O Are you trying to power off by a method other than pressing the POWER switch You cannot power off the server by using software commands such as the shutdown command Press the POWER switch to power off the server POST fails to complete O Is the DIMM installed At least one DIMM is required for operation Is the memory size large The memory check may take a time if the memory size is large Wait for a while Ll Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the server If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start up POS
33. 1 65620 MB 10000 Input the SIZE of partition 5 1 55620 MB 20000 Input the SIZE of partition 6 1 35620 MB 20000 partition 7 19809 Are you sure to create y n y Now the creation of RAID configuration begins and the process is completed unless there is any problem For RAID status user Status Raid Notes 1 Before configuring RAID insert disks to slots and add them to the system Insert the disks to make pairs in Slot and Slot4 and Slot 2 and Slot 5 In this example Slot 2 and Slot 5 are paired 2 Enter the number of partitions to create Then assign the capacity in MB to each partition Values of the last partition will be assigned automatically The partition numbers begin with 1 and the next number is 5 and the following numbers are in ascending order A certain amount of capacity is reserved for the last partition Therefore the specifiable range is smaller than actual disk capacity The actual partition size varies slightly depending on the disk structure 8 12 System Upgrade View the status of disks and confirm that the disks are added properly Command Action 1 New Disks Remove Half Disk Repair Disk Remove Full Disks Status Raid Status All Disks lt Return ODO PB C Command 5 Status Raid Name Partition Status Member md6 res ync DELAYED 2 hadc7 5 hadd7 md5 resync DELAYED 2 hadc6 5 hadd6 md4 resync DELAYED 2 ha
34. Alert DK Cancel The following is a configuration screen for LAN1 CPU IO module 0 Specify an IP address to use Make settings for LAN2 CPU IO module 1 in the same manner For the settings to take effect you need to execute OK on the previous menu BMC Configuration window Specify different IP addresses to LAN1 CPU IO module 0 and LAN2 CPU IO module 1 Subnet Mask Default Ga MAC Address 08 00 00 00 00 00 Return to previous nenu Please input IP Address exp 255 255 255 0 4 50 System Configuration TIPS To disable the remote management console function make the following settings from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Load the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM on the server and from the main menu select Tools System Management Set FT Remote Management Card LAN1 LAN2 Select Disable on Remote Management Console and register the setting The host name the domain name and the IP address cannot be modified on this screen The image below shows the setting screen for LAN1 CPU IO module 0 HostName hRRMC0000004 1 Select Enter Help H h If you use remote management for the first time the Waning Security dialogue box as shown below may be displayed Check the message and then click Yes No or Always Then you will see the logon page If you are not sure click No v Warning Security YxJ Do you want to trust the signed applet distrib
35. CRETA e CH PTR ra Peep ERP s Jte PEERS AT se DE A Bae aA EI EITHER ea UTERE Zo bm e enfe e RT ERA KE 9 gt PEPE EEE 33 T dl an
36. In storage Temperature 10 to 55 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH non condensing A 2 Specifications Appendix B I O Port Addresses The factory set I O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows Address Chip in Use 00000000 0000000F 00000020 00000021 0000002E 0000002F 00000040 00000043 0000004E 0000004F 00000060 00000060 00000061 00000061 00000064 00000064 00000070 00000073 00000080 0000008F 000000A0 000000A1 000000C0 000000DF 000000E0 000000F0 000000F0 000000FF 00000274 00000277 00000279 00000279 000002E8 000002EF 000002F8 000002FF 000003B0 000003BB 000003B0 000003BA 000003C0 000003DF 000003C0 000003DE 000003E8 000003EF 000003F8 000003FF 000004D0 000004D1 00000540 0000055F 00000560 0000056F 00000600 0000061F 00000A79 00000A79 00000CA2 00000CA5 00000CF8 00000CFF 0000FE00 0000FE20 DMA controller Programmable interruption controller Motherboard resource System timer Motherboard resource Motherboard resource System speaker Motherboard resource System CMOS real time clock DMA controller Programmable interruption controller DMA controller Motherboard resource Numerical data processor ISAPNP read data port ISAPNP read data port Motherboard resource Motherboard resource PCI standard PCI to PCI bridge Graphics controller NEC GA Driver PCI standard PCI to PCI bridge Graphics controller NEC GA Dri
37. in MTBF Clear of the target module You can confirm the MTBF clear result by checking the LEDs of the target component The result is registered in the syslog 4 Start the component Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility Main window PCI Module screen Installing and Using Utilities 5 57 Diagnostics The server provides the self check diagnostics function for some components If a fault occurs in a component the server can diagnose the component to detect the fault For this server CPU modules and IO modules can be diagnosed all together To diagnose a component with the NEC ESMPRO Manager use the Maintenance tree of the component in the data viewer Open the tree of the component to be diagnosed and select the Maintenance tree To diagnose of a component with the Server Maintenance Utility use the component screens of the Server Maintenance Utility The table below shows the potential cases in which a component is to be diagnosed Component Diagnostics P Remote Local CPU Module When a phenomenon causing the When a phenomenon causing the module to be down occurs or a phenomenon supposed to be a malfunction occurs Executable in any of the following module states this can be viewed on manager screen e Removed module to be down occurs or a phenomenon supposed to be a malfunction occurs Executable in any of the following module states This can be viewed on Server Maint
38. initialize the disk dump partition and register disk devices again 1 Select RAID Remove Half Disk of ftdiskadm to separate the disk specified by the slot number from the RAID For boot disks Slot0 and Slot3 remove the registration of the disk devices that diskdump uses 2 Select Bring Down SCSI of ftdiskadm to separate the disk specified by the slot number from the system 3 Remove the disk from the system and then insert a new disk 4 Select Bring Up SCSI of ftdiskadm to add the disk specified by the slot number to the system 5 Use Repair Disk of ftdiskadm to recover RAID The following is an example from the separation of the built in disk inserted to the slot 3 to the recovery For boot disks Slot0 and Slot3 initialize the disk partition and register the disk devices again after RAID is recovered Separating the disk from RAID diskdumpctl u dev hadb6 For boot disks Slot0 and Slot3 remove the registration of the disk devices that diskdump uses gt gt gt tdiskadm Command Action 1 gt RAID 2 gt SCSI 9 Quit Command 2 Command Action 1 New Disks 2 Remove Half Disk 3 Repair Disk 3 6 Linux Setup and Operation Remove Full Disks Status Raid Status All Disks lt Return O00 Command 2 Remove Half Disk Which scsi SLOT 0 5 3 mdadm set dev hadb2 faulty in dev mdl mdadm hot removed dev hadb2 mdad
39. module If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent Do not bind is set by MTBF type The MTBF type of the module is set to Do not bind An illegal type is set to MTBF type The specified MTBF type of the module is invalid There may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent The driver accepted to switch the Secondary Module The driver received an instruction to switch the secondary module The driver started to switch the Secondary Module The driver started switching the secondary module The driver finished successfully to switch the Secondary Module The driver successfully switched the secondary module The server is operating normally 7 18 Troubleshooting Message Meaning Action The driver failed to switch the Secondary Module The driver was unsuccessful to switch the secondary module There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver has already completed to bind the CPU module The CPU module has already been bound The driver has already completed to remove the CPU module The CPU module has already been disconnected The driver has already completed to change the priority of the CPU module The priority of the CPU module has already been changed The driver has already com
40. starting from the lowest socket number TIPS m You can add memory up to 320Fa L and 320Fa LR models 6GB 1GB x 6 m In the error messages and logs in POST NEC ESMPRO or Off line Maintenance Utility the DIMM connector may be described as group The number next to group corresponds to the connector number shown in the figure on the next page IMPORTANT m The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the DIMM Do not touch the DIMM terminals or onboard parts with a bare hand or place the DIMM directly on the desk For more information on static electricity see ANTI STATIC MEASURES m Make sure to use the DIMM authorized by NEC Installing a third party DIMM may cause a failure of the DIMM as well as the server Repair of the server due to failures or damage resulted from installing such a board will be charged m Before adding or removing DIMMs power off the server and detach the CPU IO module m Make sure to read ANTI STATIC MEASURES page 8 3 and PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE page 8 4 before installing or removing options System Upgrade 8 21 DIMM slot A1 Zl DIMM slot B1 DIMM slot A2 DIMM slot B2 DIMM slot A3 DIMM slot B3 Motherboard of the CPU IO module Precautions Note the following to install or replace DIMM m The DIMMs with the sa
41. 1 3 DIMM slot A3 on CPU module 1 1 1 4 DIMM slot B3 on CPU module 1 1 1 5 CPU 1 on CPU module 1 1 1 20 CPU 2 on CPU module 1 1 1 21 PCI module 1 1 11 PCI slot 1 on PCI module 1 1 11 1 PCI slot 2 on PCI module 1 1 11 2 Slot 1 of riser card on PCI module 1 1 11 3 Slot 2 of riser card on PCI module 1 1 11 4 PCI controller 1 on PCI module 1 1 11 100 PCI controller 2 on PCI module 1 1 11 101 Installing and Using Utilities 5 17 Device name Device ID IO hub on PCI module 1 1 11 102 Display controller on PCI module 1 1 11 103 SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 1 1 11 104 SCSI bus 1 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 1 1 11 104 0 SCSI bus 2 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 1 1 11 104 1 Ethernet adapter on PCI module 1 1 11 105 SCSI enclosure 41 SCSI slot 0 on SCSI enclosure 41 0 SCSI slot 1 on SCSI enclosure 41 1 SCSI slot 2 on SCSI enclosure 41 2 SCSI slot 3 on SCSI enclosure 41 3 SCSI slot 4 on SCSI enclosure 41 4 SCSI slot 5 on SCSI enclosure 41 5 The figure below shows the actual locations of the device names displayed on the NEC ESMPRO screen In the case of the tower model modules are mounted vertically instead of horizontally CPU IO module 1 CPU IO module 0 SCSI enclosure SCSI slots 0 through 5 from bottom to top Front view of the rack mount model 5 18 Installing and Using Utilities Supplement Note the following when using NEC ESMPRO Agent Dual registration of syslogs At
42. 1202 52026 909090909090909696909069090909090909090 39096 390000 Tower model with the front door open 2 8 General Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 POWER LED green This LED illuminates when the power supply is switched on see page 2 22 DISK ACCESS LED green amber This LED illuminates in green when the internal hard disk drives are accessed If any internal hard disk drive is failing the LED illuminates in amber see page 2 22 FT status LED green amber This LED indicates the status of the server see page 2 23 In the Duplex mode the LED illuminates in green In the Simplex mode the LED does not illuminate If either of the CPU IO modules fails the LED illuminates in amber While memory dump is being performed this LED blinks in amber CPU IO module 1 status LED This LED indicates the status of the CPU IO module 1 see page 2 24 When the module is running successfully the LED illuminates in green If the module has a problem the LED blinks in green illuminates in amber or blinks in amber CPU IO module 0 status LED This LED indicates the status of the CPU IO module 0 see page 2 24 When the module is running successfully the LED illuminates in green If the module has a problem the LED blinks in green illuminates in amber or blinks in amber UID LED blue This LED blinks by a command from software POW
43. 14 Rear VAC Was bt te dl ne cd ated aed 2 15 CPU IO Modile De et de 2 18 ft Remote Management Card sese 2 21 LEDs tet cide tsetse ts tay ed ILS M et n E 2 22 BASIC OPERATION nueit ettet rennen ete tnter en eR a ere eh Mentes i repe eh Renten ehe 2 28 Security lock front door lock for tower model Ne 2 28 Installing Removing the Front eze sess 2 29 PWET ON do 2 30 Power OFE vo EEE en ENTE EUER RE ERE TEE Ee S 2 31 POST Check nter nee a ee eret ee Ee REC ERE A 2 3 Floppy Disk Drive Option s r erre ere der ere des 2 34 CD ROM Drive ee eee at epa rate Rees 2 36 Chapter 3 Linux Setup and Operation es 3 1 HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT ON THE NEC Express5800 ft SCTIGS o Sis ed ae aN siete lid oe di LT ua lsat er ine ste tle 3 2 REPLACING 3 5 INCH HARD DISK DRIVE nn 3 3 How to Locate Failed Disks es 3 3 Restoring Redundant Configuration Manually sees 3 5 SETTING THE VIDEOMODE nm nennen ener entente nne tnen nennen nennen 3 10 NOt68 ete dete ete edv ee ed este eee ge 3 11 DUMP INITIALIZATION ettet tnter fter E EDI IEEE ehe Phi ee Hehe teniente 3 12 KEYBOARD SETTINGS FOR X WINDOW SYSTEME eese 3 14 ACCESSING USB FDD S00 en d p e er ne eee pep toners 3 16 NOfeS o Rege e ORE a e E RR edem eo e oe be e eed 3 16 Chapter 4 System Configuration eese nnne nnne nnns 4 1 BY 4 2 Slav DET UP UL oe a 4 3 Description of On Screen Items and Key Usage 4 4 Configuration
44. 39 8 T 7900 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0099999000099220009009090600099290 20909909941 On0R0R0R0R0 04070505050507070505050 0 0 0 0 0 oo no or oN NN NO NN NO NN NYDN ee de de o o Backup device tray 8 14 System Upgrade Installing 5 25 inch Device 1 See page 8 4 to prepare for installation 2 Loosen screws to remove the side cover 3 Loosen screws to remove the tray for adding devices 4 Remove the four screws securing the dummy cover and remove the dummy cover System Upgrade 8 15 5 Fix the device to the tray for adding devices with the four screws TIPS Referring to the manual that comes with the 5 25 inch device you are to install set the TermPower to Enable 6 Gently insert the device into the tray and secure it with the screw 7 Connect the SCSI cable and power cords to the J device IMPORTANT Distorted connector pins or loose connections may cause malfunction Make sure that the device and cable connectors are connected correctly Secure the side cover with the screws Set up the SCSI BIOS referring to the manual shipped with the SCSI controller 10 Install the device driver of the installed device Removing 5 25 inch Device Removal is the reverse of the installation 8 16 System Upgrade CPU IO MODULE To replace a CP
45. 74 Chapter 6 Maintenance se a a 6 1 DAILY MAINTENANCE pn ener nre entretenir ener enint ene nennen 6 2 Checking Alert 5o eeotex eb mee nbuien 6 2 vi Checking STATUS LEDS inneren eee e de eee fe eni 6 2 Making Backup Copies ences dee ee en e TRE ip ER ee enn 6 3 Eun c 6 3 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS eere tte ttes iei ees e die eee dE Ee ere ege een 6 7 SET SP 0 7 Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics nn 6 7 OFF LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY me enne enne nennen 6 11 Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility sess 6 11 Features of Off line Maintenance Utility sse 6 11 RELOCATING STORING THE NEC Express5800 ft series sss 6 13 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting esee 7 1 TO LOCATE THE ERRORS bmn PORRO EE OE RO Le E e ERR D E D rh La ET 7 2 BRROR MESSAGES dde diro en e oe n eni p epe e dame i reprend 7 3 Error Messages by LED Indication s m nere 7 3 POST Brrot MeSSageS cciam ed e ott 7 4 Error Notification by BEE 7 12 Linx Error Messages eee a Wi Ceres 7 13 Server Management Application Error Message Ne 7 22 SOLVING PROBLEMS ette rire prat rer ener ON RR C Pn hne E i 7 23 Problems with NEC Express5800 ft SeTieS sess 7 23 Byent LOoBz este ntn ie teet ite et te arn NAE cine 7 31 SYSLOG aee eM eee Rt aset hin ok LA Die eiie Ai ks tt frin lel Os tots 7 32 Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER eere ener ener 7 35 Problems with NEC ESMPRO
46. BMC IP address or host name followed by a colon and http port number If the http port number is 80 the default value you can omit the port number When connecting to network which supports DHCP protocol The default host name of BMC is ARMC characters followed by the MAC address if you use DHCP functions and automatically register it with your DNS server IP Address User Name 192 168 1 1 administrator Default host Password None ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name When connecting to network which does not support DHCP protocol 1 The default IP address of the LAN of the managed server is 192 168 1 1 for both CPU IP module 0 and 1 If you want to access the network that does not support DHCP protocol access the network that the default IP address can use and then set the IP address according to your network environment from the managing PC see BMC Configuration System Configuration 4 49 2 Ifyou cannot use the default IP 192 168 1 1 start up the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM on the server and select Tools System Management Set System Management Parameters Configuration Select New to register new settings or Change to change the settings Then set IP addresses of the managed LAN ports on the BMC Configuration menu LANI CPU IO Module 0 management LAN port LAN2 CPU IO Module 1 management LAN port Connan LANI LANI Alert LANZ LAN
47. Clean the Equipment Cleanliness of the equipment is very important not only for reasons of appearance but also from the viewpoints of function and safety Especially you need to regularly clean the display which gets unclear due to the accumulation of dirt Take a break when you get tired If you feel tired you are recommended to refresh yourself by taking a short break or doing a light exercise 1 24 Precautions for Use This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 2 General Description This chapter describes what you need to know to use the NEC Express5800 ft series Refer to this chapter when you want to know about certain components and how to operate them 2 2 General Description STANDARD FEATURES High performance W Intel Xeon Processor 320Fa L 320Fa LR 3 2GHz W High speed Ethernet interface 1000Mbps 100Mbps 10Mbps supported W High speed disk access Ultra320 SCSI Expandability W Two slots low profile of PCI bus 100MHz 320Fa L 320Fa LR W Large memory of up to 6 GB 320Fa L 320Fa LR W Remote power on feature W USB interface W Backup device bays as standard equipment 320Fa L High reliability W Memory monitoring feature 1 bit error correction 2 bit error detection Bus parity error detection Temperature monitoring Error notification Built in fan monitoring feature Internal voltage monitoring feature BIOS password feature Security feature security lock for f
48. DIMM is faulty Replace DIMM Group 1 Replace DIMM Group 2 Replace DIMM Group 3 0B70 The error occurred during temperature sensor reading I2C pass is faulty Sensor is faulty Replace the part that relevant sensor is mounted 0B71 System Temperature out of the range Temperature is abnormal Fan is abnormal Check if fan is faulty or clogging has occurred If there is no problem replace CPU IO module 0B74 The error occurred during voltage sensor I2C pass is faulty Sensor is faulty Replace the part that relevant sensor is mounted reading 0B75 System voltage out of Voltage is abnormal If turning AC power off and on the range does not help replace the CPU IO module 0B80 BMC Memory Test Failed 0B81 BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed 0B82 BMC core Hardware failure RMC device is faulty Replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option 7 6 Troubleshooting On screen error message Cause Action 0B83 BMC IBF or OBF check failed RMC device is faulty Replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option 0B8A BMC SEL area full There is no space to write System event logs Clear system event logs after saving them 0B8B BMC progress check timeout BMC check is suspended Replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option OB8C BMC command access faile
49. Ds e RECETAS WREKE MRENE EREKE O O DOOO ari DS Be AS REE TIRE E UGE e AER EKKE e Y D BUT T ES e aus Nase DER E ERARE BENK SEPA FE AER o ante ET TERE NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT RERU A RIA CLASS 1 LASER PRODU
50. From the Window menu you can open windows including the KVM console window 3 Main frame A window is shown here 4 Click this to show the Help menu Click Help to see the version information of this applet Control panel The control panel allows you to see the server status and to control power The control panel also allows you to activate windows Control panel functions i 9 0009 0609g T 4 54 System Configuration 1 Displays the BMC host name or IP address 2 Displays the LCD of the server 3 The power lamp of the server telling you of the power status 4 The same as pressing the POWER switch of the server but pressing it for 4 or more seconds the forced power off is not supported 5 Performs memory dump on the server the same as pressing the DUMP switch of the server 6 Makes the Unit ID lamp of the server blink 7 Starts up the remote KVM console 8 Starts up the BMC configuration 9 Stats up the firmware update 10 A user name is displayed here 11 Displays the connectivity with BMC 12 Displays communication security status 13 Displays network access status 14 The status lamp of the server telling you of the server status 15 Opens the window showing system event logs SEL 16 Opens the window showing the sensor device information SDR 17 Opens the window showing the information on parts to be replaced for maint
51. Level 3 WEB Server a To Address test test com F of From Address alert abme com E Mail Alerting Message This is an E Mail Alerting Message of SMTP Server Address smtp sample com S SMTP Port Number 25 f Retry Count 10 times 5f Retry Interval 60 sec 5f with Product Name Enable of with IP Address Enable with Event Time Enable with SEL Data Enable Vf with URL Enable of with FQDN Enable of with LCD Message Enable Timezone 0000 When you click the icon for editing a the window for editing appears as shown in the next page The window for editing has four tabs Basic 1 2 3 System Configuration 4 71 of E Mail Alert Settings Basic Message SMTP Option Basic Settings Alert Mail v Enable Alert Level Level3 Level2 Non criticab v Mail Test Do Mail Test EA Send Test E Mail Specify whether or not to enable the alert mail functions by the check box When you select the check box you can make mail related settings Select a notice level from six levels Levels are categorized according to severity of factor events Allows you to send a test mail IMPORTANT Perform the mail test after you have completely configured E Mail Alert Settings described in the following pages Making entries in the editing window does not complete settings You need to click OK after entering all the
52. Maintenance Utility Mallar None System Diagnostics Create Support Disk BIOS FW etc Update Initialize Remote Management Card System Management Help Return to the Top Menu m Off line Maintenance Utility Off line Maintenance Utility is an OS dependent maintenance program that performs preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server See Chapter 6 or the online help for details m System Diagnostics Executes several tests on the main system to examine the features of the system and the connections between the system and extension boards If the system diagnosis is executed the system check program is started depending on the system status See the description in Chapter 6 to manipulate the system check program m Create Support Disk In the support disk creation procedure the starting support disk for starting a utility within the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from a floppy disk and the support disk required in the installation of the operating system can be created If you write down the titles appearing on the screen on the floppy disk labels they can be easily managed later 5 6 Installing and Using Utilities The customer should prepare the floppy disks for creating the support disks ROM DOS Startup FD The support disk for starting the ROM DOS system is created Off line Maintenance Utility FD Creates a support disk for activating the Off line Maintenance Utility System Diagnostics Utility FD T
53. Manager to start the data viewer in the following description the start procedure of the data viewer is omitted The server is physically configured with two modules but each module has a CPU module and IO module Therefore NEC ESMPRO Manager Data Viewer displays module 0 and module 1 in a tree and under each of them a CPU module and PCI module are displayed on a Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager and Server Maintenance Utility of NEC ESMPRO Agent the IO module is indicated as PCI module Installing and Using Utilities 5 25 Monitoring CPU Module To monitor the CPU modules and the components on the CPU module see the CPU Module tree To see the information on the CPU Module tree select the target CPU module from CPU Module in the ft tree You can see the following information on the modules and the components on the CPU modules in the CPU Module tree m General Allows the configuration and other information on the CPU modules to be viewed HILLIZNDTI eee Moduleit J amp gt ala ejm s Flr el SERVER D ESMPRO Seavert f Mr non ED owe Bl ro masoia D Mri PCI Sieh ID 0 10 0 PCI Sict D 0 10 1 D E rcr sooo e B Pct skeet 0 10 9 e Bl Pct sheer 0 10 4 M PCI Siet D 0 10 100 PCI Sict 10 0 10 101 PCI Sih ID 0 10 102 PCI Skct 10 0 10 103 PCI Sket 10 0 10 104 PCI Si ID 0 10 105 CS Adieter 20 0 10 104 mu PME chemet board T0 0 10 105 Porto M pum m Maintena
54. No If you select Yes and then press the Enter key all items in the setup are set to default values If you select No and then press either the Enter or Esc key the status before pressing the F9 key is restored F10 System Configuration 4 5 Shows the following Setup Confirmation Save Configur ation changes and exit now Yes No If you select Yes and then press the Enter key the setup will complete with all changes you have made saved If you select No and then press either the Enter or Esc key the status before pressing the F10 key is restored 4 6 System Configuration Configuration Examples The following describes examples of configuration required to use software link features or for system operations Link with Management Software To control power supply of the server with NEC ESMPRO Manager via the network lt Using the LAN connector on the motherboard gt Select Advanced Advanced Chipset Control Wake On LAN Enabled Using the PCI LAN card gt Select Advanced Advanced Chipset Control Wake On PME Enabled UPS To link power supply with the UPS m To power on the server when power is supplied from the UPS Select Server AC LINK Power On m To keep the server off powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER switch was used to power off Select Server AC LINK Last State m To keep the server off powered even when power is supp
55. Not support The table below shows the support of the whole system setup functions i Automatic firmware Y Component Quick dump update Automatic module start R L R L R L Whole system y N E d Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility Support Not support abr 5 50 Installing and Using Utilities Start and Stop of Components To start or stop a component with NEC ESMPRO Manager use the Maintenance tree of the component in the ft tree of the data viewer Open the tree of the component to be started or stopped and select the Maintenance tree To start or stop a component with the Server Maintenance Utility use the component screens of the Server Maintenance Utility The table below shows the potential cases in which a component is to be started or stopped Compo Start Stop nent Remote Local Remote Local CPU When the cause of When the cause of When system is When system is Module down is reviewed down is reviewed stopped forcibly stopped forcibly and the system is and the system is due to replacement due to replacement restarted in module restarted in module or malfunction of or malfunction of down state down state module module i Executable in the Executable in the Executable in any of following module Executable in the following
56. Off The FC device is not duplex FT LED Off The FC device is not duplexed Since removal of each device was not completed the driver was not able to bind the CPU IO module The CPU IO module cannot be bound because devices have not been comopletely removed yet HAS driver enabled use of USB The USB queue timed out FT LED Off South Bridge is not doubled FT LED Off The South Bridge is not duplexed FT LED Off PCI Express 0 is not doubled FT LED Off The PCI Express 0 is not duplexed FT LED Off PCI Express 1 is not doubled FT LED Off The PCI Express 1 is not duplexed FT LED Off CPU is not doubled FT LED Off The CPU is not duplexed Removal of SCSI device was not completed The removal processing of the SCSI device has not been completed FT LED Off The doubleness information about an I O device is not reported FT LED Off The duplexity information on the I O device has not been reported Take necessary actions referring to Troubleshooting in the User s Guide Service is stopped by the notice of a stop The HAS management service is stopped by an instruction from the OS Snapshot dump is started The dump service of the system running in the duplex mode is started Stop image dump is started The dump service of the system running in the simplex mode is started Quick dump is started
57. Primary Secondary state of the IO module The driver received an instruction to change the primary secondary state of the IO module The driver started to switch Primary Secondary state of the IO module The driver started changing the primary secondary state of the IO module The server is operating normally The driver finished successfully to switch Primary Secondary state of the IO module The driver successfully changed the primary secondary state of the IO module The server is operating normally Troubleshooting 7 15 Message Meaning Action The driver failed to switch Primary Secondary state of the IO module The driver was unsuccessful to change the primary secondary state of the IO module There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver started to bind the Module The driver started bindng the CPU IO module The driver finished successfully to bind the Module The driver successfully bounded the module The server is operating normally The driver failed to bind the Module The driver was unsuccessful to bind the module There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver accepted to remove the Module The driver received an instruction to disconnect the module The driver started to remove the Module The driver started disconnecting the mod
58. The UDP connection is closed If you do not find any problem contact your service representative System event log SEL display errors Failed to acquire system event logs No Error message Action 1 i The network may be busy Try again If the error Failed to clear session event logs of BMC persists contact your service representative because j a failure may have occurred in BMC 2 The network may be busy Try again If the error persists contact your service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC Sensor data records SDR display error No Error message Action 1 Failed to acquire sensor data records The network may be busy Try again If the error persists contact your service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC Field replaceable FRU information display error No Error message Action 1 Failed to acquire field replaceable units information The network may be busy Try again If the error persists contact your service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC 4 82 System Configuration BMC configuration errors No Error message Action 1 Check the network environment and try again Failed to make settings Contact your service representative if the error persists 2 2 Failed to
59. acquire BMC Check the network environment and try again SEM Contact your service representative if the error Configuration s persists 3 Used by other software program Try again after a while Try again anten awhile 4 Invalid BMC configuration file The BMC configuration file may be corrupted Check the file 3 The required XML tag is not The BMC configuration file may be corrupted Check found the file 6 The BMC configuration file is not saved successfully Failed to write the file i Change the location to save the file and try again d You can use only alphanumeric characters minus Invalid user name sign and underscore for a user name A user name should be 31 characters or less The user name is too long A user name should be 31 characters or less j The password is too long Use 16 or less characters 19 Passwords are not matched Enter passwords again 11 Invalid HTTP port number You can only use numeric values 12 Invalid SSL port number You can only use numeric values p HTTP SSL should not be the The same port number cannot be specified for HTTP same and SSL Specify different value 14 Invalid login attempt period You can only use numeric values 19 Invalid failed login attempts You can only use numeric values 19 Invalid account lock period You can only use numeric values u Invalid IP address Use numbers and periods to specify an IP address 18 Invalid subnet mask Use numbers and periods to specify a sub
60. board is installed to one group another identical PCI board should be installed to the same slot in another group This rule is applied to the case of removal m Install the PCI boards starting from the one with the smallest number System Upgrade 8 35 List of option PCI boards and installable slots N code Product name 320Fa L 320Fa LR Remarks PCI 1 PCI 2 PCI slot 64bit 100MHz performance Slot size Low Profile PCI board type 3 3V Mountable board MD2 size N8804 002 1000BASE T 1ch Oo o Only one board can be mounted board set when N8804 004 or N8803 033 is N8804 003 1000BASE SX 1ch Oo o installed board set N8804 004 1000BASE T 2ch o o Up to one board can be mounted board set per CPU IO module N8803 032 SCSI board o o N8803 033 Fibre Channel board o o set 8 36 System Upgrade Installing PCI Board Follow the procedure below to install the board to be connected to the PCI board slot TIPS To install the PCI board make sure the shape of the board connector matches with the shape of the PCI board slot connector 1 Remove the CPU IO module referring to the page 8 17 2 Identify the slot to which you want to install a PCI board and remove the connector cap IMPORTANT Carefully keep the removed connector cap 3 Remove the PCI bracket by loosening the screw and remove the slot cover of an expansion slot IMPORTANT Keep and store
61. box if you want to disable SSL TIPS It is recommended to use connection by the encrypted HTTPS protocol unless you have any specific reason such as SSL cannot be used By default this option is disabled Specify the SSL port number Specify the logon trial period during which you can try logging on again if you have failed to log on Specify the number of logon retries If the number of retries exceeds the number specified here during the period specified in 4 logon retries will be rejected for the time period specified in 6 Specify the time period during which logon is rejected TIPS Though the three steps mentioned above are effective in blocking automatic unauthorized logons they do not completely block such logons 4 70 System Configuration If you click Default the default values for HTTP port number SSL port number logon trial period number of logon retries and the account lock period are displayed The SSL check box configuration remains the same When you click OK all of what you have set will be written into the BMC When you click Cancel the editing window closes without saving what you have edited Alert Mail Configuration Here you can make alert mail settings for BMC When you click Alert Mail on the left pane of the BMC configuration window the right pane shows the summary of the alert mail settings BMC Settings User Ja Enable Re Network jsf Alert Level
62. component appears Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs Diagnose the component by selecting Diagnose in PCI Module Diagnosis The result can be viewed by reacquiring the status of the component The result 1s registered in syslog Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility Main window PCI Module screen 5 60 Installing and Using Utilities Firmware Update The server can update firmware including BIOS if some hardware components operate in the online state in which the system continues the operation but the component trying to update firmware or BIOS is stopped To update firmware with NEC ESMPRO Manager use the Update tree of the component in the data viewer Open the tree of the component for which firmware is updated and select the Update tree To update the firmware of a component with the Server Maintenance Utility use the component screens of the Server Maintenance Utility To update the firmware of a component the firmware image file of the firmware for update must previously be stored in the managed server On the firmware update screen specify the path to the firmware image file for update The table below shows the potential cases in which the firmware of a component is to be updated Firmware update Remote Local Component CPU Module When BIOS must be updated to new one Executable in any of the following module states this can be viewed on mana
63. cool sheet on the heat sink 11 Place the heat sink on top of the CPU 12 Secure the heat skink with the screws Firstly fasten four screws in a crisscross pattern tentatively then fasten the screws tightly 8 28 System Upgrade 13 Confirm that the heat sink is mounted horizontally to the motherboard 14 15 16 17 18 IMPORTANT m Ifthe heat sink is not horizontally to the motherboard dismount and remount it The heat sink cannot be mounted correctly if the CPU is not mounted correctly the screws are not fully fastened m Do not hold the fastened heat sink to move the CPU Insert the cable and then install the cooling fan unit Install the CPU IO module referring to page 8 19 Connect the power cords Press the POWER switch to power on the server Verify that POST displays no error message If POST displays an error message write it down and see the POST error message list on page 7 4 oe ly System Upgrade 8 29 Removing CPU Model with Heat Sink When you remove a CPU prepare for removal referring to the steps from 1 to 4 of Installing CPU Model with Heat Sink Then follow the installation steps from 12 to 7 To remove the heat sink remove the screws move the heat sink horizontally a little and then remove it IMPORTANT m Do not remove the CPU unless it is faulty m After operation the cool sheet at the bottom of the heat sink may stick to the CPU becau
64. formatting for the selected device Verify Disk Media compares verifies all sectors of the selected device and if there is any bad sector re assignment will be performed System Configuration 4 37 FORCED SHUTDOWN AND CLEAR Read this section if your server does not operate as expected or if you want to return all setup values to those made at shipment Forced Shutdown Use this function when an OS command does not shut down the server the POWER switch does not turn off the server or resetting does not work Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for over four seconds The power is forcibly turned off To turn on the power back again wait approximately 30 seconds after turning off the power forced shutdown IMPORTANT If the remote power on feature is used power on the Press it for over 4 seconds server and start the OS and turn off the power in the normal way 4 38 System Configuration CLEAR CMOS PASSWORD With the pre installed SETUP utility you can set desired passwords to protect data stored on the server from unauthorized user access If you forget the password you can clear them by following the procedure described in this section You can also use the same procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server IMPORTANT m Clearing the CMOS data restores the factory settings m To clear the password or CMOS data power off the server To clear the password or the CMOS data
65. help replace another CPU IO module or center plane 7 10 Troubleshooting On screen error message Cause Action 9027 Mounted CPU is CPU configuration may be mismatching different between the CPU IO modules Replace the CPU If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9028 Memory of the different types Memory of the different types is is installed installed Replace DIMM with appropriate one If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9029 DIMM is faulty Replace DIMM If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 902A Initialization of the cross link When the system is running in between the CPU IO modules the duplex mode it is no and access are faulty problem If the system cannot be running in the duplex mode due to continuous this error replace the CPU IO module If this does not help replace another CPU IO module or center plane 902B BIOS revision does not This BIOS revision cannot match support the duplex mode Update the BIOS revision 9031 Configuration of PCI riser is Check the PCI configuration mismatch If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9032 The microcode to CPU is not Unsupported CPU may be found and it cannot update mounted normally Replace the CPU If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9033 The microcode to CPU Replace the CPU cannot update normally If this does not help replace the CPU IO module
66. is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT This label id located on CLASS 1 the internal CD ROM installed in your system LASER PRODUCT NOTE This product provides resistance against hardware faults with its redundant hardware modules However this does not mean complete fault tolerance is assured For example there is a risk of system down when A fatal fault occurs in software Both modules within a redundant hardware pair break down A fatal fault occurs in a non redundant component such as the clock generator circuitry or the interconnect backplane The entire system is cut off from AC power NEC Express5800 ps o ASL AR SASL TROOP TURO AURERE ERIHRE TTG HUI ec EREHE RETE HU JB APPR SR REER TA BEA E O NEXU o ARAT MANNE EUNET En ced AARE e NONE EOMER ERE ee BRA Ge RAIA T SEO GER S KREITA PREMIER ESSA IETS
67. it You can use this NEC Express5800 ft series in a mission critical system where high availability is required By the use of Linux operating system it also provides outstanding openness for general purpose applications etc To make the best use of these features read this User s Guide thoroughly to understand how to operate NEC Express5800 ft series ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE This User s Guide helps a user to properly setup and use the product Consult this guide to ensure safety as well as to cope with trouble during a system setup and daily operation Keep this manual handy This User s Guide is intended for users who have a good knowledge on the basic use of Linux operating systems and general I O devices such as a keyboard and mouse How to Use This User s Guide This guide consists of eight chapters and appendices To help you find a solution quickly the guide contains the following information For descriptions on setting up this product see the separate volume User s Guide Setup Read Precautions for Use first Before going on to main chapters be sure to read Precautions for Use These precautions are very important for using the product safely Chapter 1 Precautions for Use This chapter describes precautions necessary to use the product safely and properly Be sure to read this chapter before using the product It also provides information on user support It will be helpful when you need mainten
68. m Chassis Identification Provides the function to distinguish the server using the LEDs or beeps of the server This function is convenient to distinguish the server from others when multiple servers are on the rack Maintenance 6 13 RELOCATING STORING THE NEC Express5800 ft series Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server Users should not attempt to remove the rack mountable server from the rack assembly A CAUTION S A Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of fire personal injury or property damage See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1 for details e Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself e Do not install the server in any place other than specified e Do not connect disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source IMPORTANT m Ifthe server needs to be relocated stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great extent contact the sales agent m Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk if any m When moving the server with hard disks make sure not to give a shock to the hard disks m When storing the server keep it under storing environment conditions temperature 10 to 55 C humidity 20 to 80 non condensing Take a floppy disk and a CD ROM out of the server if any Power off the server Unplug the power cord of the server f
69. monitoring by NEC ESMPRO Manager is on default ON NEC ESMPRO Manager regularly issues a request to NEC ESMPRO Agent to get the current status of the server In response NEC ESMPRO Agent checks the status of the server As a result the CPU load ratio of SNMP Service increases temporarily If you have trouble of terminating a movie player application turn off the server status monitoring by NEC ESMPRO Manager or extend the monitoring interval Installing and Using Utilities 5 21 Current Status of Temperature Voltage and Fan Sensors Some modes are equipped with temperature voltage fan sensors that do not have information on status current values rpm threshold etc Therefore if you view such a sensor on NEC ESMPRO Manager it may be displayed as follows m The status becomes Unknown grayed out on the data viewer m The current value or rpm becomes Unknown on data viewer Even if the sensor is displayed like stated above it is monitoring the server Actions to Take When Temperature Voltage Error Occurs on CPU PCI Modules At the time when a temperature or voltage error occurs on CPU PCI module CPU IO module necessary actions will differ depending on its status as shown below You can check the status of each module from the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager or Server Maintenance Utility Status Actions Duplex Stop the failed CPU PCI module CPU IO module Simplex Shut down the system TI
70. n n 1303 Link Up Event x1 received Data xx xx xx xx 663699 When unmounting a module gt is different for each system Ipfc nnnn nn nn n n 0203 Nodev timeout on NPort xxx Data xxxxx xx XX Ipfc nnnn nn nn n n 0253 Illegal State Transition node xe8 event xx state xx Data xx xxxxx Ipfc nnnn nn nn n n 0263 Cannot block scsi target target ptr XXXXXXXXX Ipfc nnnn nn nn n dma pool destroy Ipfc mbuf pool xxxxxxxx busy Troubleshooting 7 35 Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM check the following O Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM during POST and restart the server Ifyou do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM during POST and restart the server an error message will appear or the OS will boot Is BIOS configuration correct The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS setup utility of the server Use the BIOS setup utility to change the boot device order to boot the system from the CD ROM drive first lt Menu to check Boot gt When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress the following message appears After this message appears check the error and take the appropriate corrective action according to the error codes listed in the table below This machine is not supported This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is not designed for this server Execute the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server
71. network adapter and or SCSI adapter and or FC adapter is not in dual mode the following message will be recorded to the system event log and the IO module will not be separated In this case check each adapter setting referring to After starting up FT Status LED do not illuminate or illuminate amber of this chapter Source HasCtrl Type Warning Event ID 1505 Description Device Device name is not duplexing Device name LAN or SCSI or FC When you attempt to disconnect IO module when the HAS Fault Tolerance service is not started the following message will be recorded to the system event log and the IO module will not be separated In this case refer to After starting up FT Status LED do not illuminate or illuminate amber of this chapter to start the HAS Fault Tolerance service and retry disconnecting the I O module Troubleshooting 7 29 Source HasCtrl Type Warning Event ID 1506 Description The doubleness information about an I O device is not reported Video mode cannot be changed by using the Xrandr feature of XServer Specification of the server For setting the video mode see SETTING THE VIDEO MODE on page 3 10 Settings such as screen size and color are made from Control Panel but they are not enabled Specification of the server Even if you change the video mode on the DisplaySetting tab displayed by selecting the Start menu System Control Panel
72. nonconforming power cords AC cord is to spend the thing of the next specifications Maximum 4 5m 14 76 ft long Rated minimum 125V 10A Type SJT flexible cord You also have to observe the following prohibitions about handling and connecting interface cables Do not pull on the cord Do not pinch the cord Do not bend the cord Keep chemicals away from the cord Do not twist the cord Do not tread on the cord Do not place any object on the cord Do not use cords as bundled Do not alter modify or repair the cord Do not staple the cord Do not use any damaged cord Replace it with a new one of the same specifications For replacement procedures contact your sales agent Precautions for Use 1 7 Installation Relocation Storage and Connection A WARNING Disconnect the power cord s before installing or removing the equipment Be sure to power off the equipment and unplug its power cords from the wall outlet before installation relocation All voltage is removed only when the power cords are unplugged A CAUTION gt gt Do not install or store the equipment in an unsuitable place Install or store the equipment in such a place as specified in this User s Guide Avoid the following or there is a risk of a fire m a dusty place m a humid place located near a boiler etc m a place exposed to direct sunlight m an unstable place Be careful not to hurt your fi
73. of disassembling replacing or recharging it yourself 1 22 Precautions for Use IF SYSTEM TROUBLE IS SUSPECTED Before sending the equipment for repair try the following 1 Check if its power cord and connection cables are attached correctly 2 See ERROR MESSAGES in Chapter 7 to check if there is a relevant symptom If yes take measures as instructed 3 Certain software programs are required for operation of NEC Express5800 ft series Check if these programs are properly installed 4 Useacommercially available anti virus program to check the server If the problem is not solved by the above actions stop using the server and consult with your sales agent In this case check LED indications of the server and alarm indications on the display which will serve as helpful information at the time of repair ABOUT REPAIR PARTS The minimum duration of holding repair parts of this equipment may be different for each country so contact the NEC sales representatives If the period is not specified the repair parts are kept for 5 years after discontinuance of the product ABOUT OUR WEB SERVICE Information on NEC Express5800 ft series including modification modules is also available on our web site NEC Express5800 Web Site Asia Pacific at http www nec co jp express index html Precautions for Use 1 23 Advice for Your Health Prolonged use of a computer may affect your health Keep in mind
74. off power cycle or reset the server The server does not support such functions Chapter 6 Maintenance This chapter describes the daily maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series and precautions when relocating or storing the server 6 2 Maintenance DAILY MAINTENANCE To use your NEC Express5800 ft series in best condition check and maintain regularly as described below If an error is found on your NEC Express5800 ft series consult your sales agent Checking Alert Monitor the failure occurrence by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation Always check whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the management PC Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window Data Viewer or Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager Viewers of NEC ESMPRO Be Eh Wew Toots Wen spp abel Data Viewer Checking STATUS LEDs Check the LED indication on the front of the NEC Express5800 ft series on hard disks installed in 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay or on LCD display when the server is powered on or powered off by the shut down operation The functions and indications of LEDs are described in Chapter 2 If any indication that shows an error contact your sales agent Maintenance 6 3 Making Backup Copies NEC recommends you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the server on a regular basis For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools con
75. one module if the other module is inserted to the chassis it will be automatically started and modules will become duplex The module POWER switch of the server is always enabled regardless of this setting The module stopped by the module POWER switch can be started even when this setting is disabled The following buttons are displayed for System Configuration Item Description Apply Applies the system configuration to the server Default Resets the system configuration of the server to the default These operations cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating firmware Wait until such processing is finished to perform the operations in the table Module n Module contains the following information Item Description Device CPU module name and PCI module name Status Status of the CPU module and the PCI module CPU Module ID n m CPU Module contains the following information Item Description Status Status of the CPU module Installing and Using Utilities 5 43 MTBF Information contains the following information Note The MTBF information is displayed only when the lt MTBF Info gt button is pressed Item Description Type Monitoring status of MTBF Use Threshold MTBF is calculated at a fault occurrence The device is stopped when the calculated value is lower than the threshold Never Restart Always stops the device at a fault occur
76. options On screen error message Cause Action 0200 Failure Fixed Disk e Hard disk is faulty e CPU IO module is faulty e Replace the hard disk e Replace the CPU IO module 0210 Stuck Key Keyboard connection error e Disconnect the keyboard and connect it back again e Replace the keyboard 0211 Keyboard error Keyboard is faulty e Disconnect the keyboard and connect it back again e Replace the keyboard e If restarting does not help replace the CPU IO module 0212 Keyboard Controller Failed Keyboard controller is faulty If restarting the server does not help replace the CPU IO module 0213 Keyboard locked Unlock key switch Keyboard is locked Unlock the key switch 0230 System RAM Failed at DIMM is faulty e Replace DIMM offset e Replace the CPU IO module 0231 Shadow RAM Failed at Shadow RAM is faulty e Replace DIMM offset e Replace the CPU IO module 0232 Extended RAM Failed at address line Extended RAM is faulty e Replace DIMM e Replace CPU IO module 0233 Memory type mixing detected Memory of the different types is installed Memory of the different types is installed Replace DIMM with appropriate one 0250 System battery is dead Replace and run SETUP System battery is dead e Replace system battery e Replace CPU IO module Troubleshooting 7 5 On screen error message Cause Act
77. other error information and boot with POST sides of modules is detected the error information of standby error CPU IO module 9000 A serious error occurred There are some error messages during a POST in addition to this error code Check the other error message 9007 Forced power off occurred by Pull out another CPU IO module another CPU IO module has and install it a problem If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9008 Forced power off occurred by Pull out another CPU IO module another CPU IO module has and install it a problem If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9010 9015 Can not boot from target Disk Check the target disk In addition replace it if required If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9020 CPU is faulty Replace the CPU If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9022 9023 Initialization of the cross link When the system is running in between the CPU IO modules the duplex mode it is no and access are faulty problem If the system cannot be running in the duplex mode due to continuous this error replace the CPU IO module If this does not help replace another CPU IO module or center plane 9024 Disconnect the cross link When the system is running in between the CPU IO the duplex mode it is no modules problem If the system cannot be running in the duplex mode due to continuous this error replace the CPU IO module If this does not
78. required information to complete the BMC settings TIPS The X Priority field in the mail header changes according to the severity of factoring event Non recoverable Critical X Priority 1 Non critical X Priority 3 OK Information Monitoring X Priority 5 4 72 System Configuration Message Message Settings To test test com demo demo net gt MERE alert abmc com Po Subiect E Mail Alerting Message OE Message his is an E Mail Alerting Message For more information click the URL below Get Default Message OK Cancel 1 Specify mail address of receivers to whom alert mail is sent You can specify up to four addresses 2 Specify the sender s address used in alert mail 3 Enter the subject to be given to alert mail 4 Select whether or not to enable the body messages for all alert mail which is configured in the next step 5 Enter the body message to be used in all alert mail If you do not need such a body message clear the check box of 4 If you click Get Default Message the recommended message appears TIPS The subject and message you configure here will be used in all alert mails System Configuration 4 73 SMTP of E Mail Alert Settings 2 Basic Message SMTP Option SMTP Settings e Server Address smtp sample com SMTP Port Number 25 Retry
79. software programs have commands to eject media on the tray of a CD ROM drive or device installed in a 5 25 inch device bay Before you run any of these commands make sure the front door is open If you run the command with the front door closed the media on the CD ROM tray or 5 25 inch device bumps against the door and the server can get damaged To open the front door unlock it and then hold the handle located in the right middle of the door gently and pull it toward you When you close the front door it is recommended to lock it for Q amp Front door locked security reasons General Description 2 29 Installing Removing the Front Bezel When you power on off the server operate the CD ROM drive or remove install a hard disk drive or CPU IO module remove the front bezel IMPORTANT Front bezel cannot be opened without inserting the attached security key into the slot to release the lock 1 Insert the security key into the slot and turn it left with a little pressure to release the lock 2 Hold the right side of the front bezel lightly and pull it toward you 3 Detach the front bezel from the main unit by sliding it to the left a little to disengage the tabs from the frame To attach the front bezel engage the tabs on the frame on the left side of the main unit After attaching and closing the front bezel lock it with the key for security 2 30 General Description
80. starting it This command starts X Window and the screen will be displayed in the Japanese fonts init 5 If you star the Server Maintenance Utility without starting the X Window messages displayed on the console may affect the screen display If the screen is not displayed properly press Ctrl L to refresh the screen Chapter 8 System Upgrade This chapter describes procedures to add options and replace failed components IMPORTANT m Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by the user However NEC does not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the server or malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user NEC recommends you ask your sales agent to install or remove any optional devices m Besure to use only optional devices and cables designated by NEC Repair of the server due to malfunctions failures or damage resulted from installing such devices or cables will be charged 8 2 System Upgrade SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly QO Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of death or serious personal injury See PRECAUTIONS FOR A SAFETY in Chapter 1 for details AC Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Do not look into the CD ROM drive Do not remove the lithium battery Disconnect the power plug before worki
81. the configuration data and exit the SETUP Saving Dump Files Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs Insert a metal pin a straightened large paper clip will make a substitute into the switch hole to press the switch Pressing the switch saves the dump file in the specified directory Memory dumping may not be available when the CPU stalls Dump switches IMPORTANT Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break When the DUMP switch is pressed the system restarts and collects the memory dump Troubleshooting 7 39 Time Required for Dump Collection QuickDump 1 From pressing the NMI switch until the server is started about 5 minutes 2 From the server startup until the completion of a dump file creation 10 minutes 1GB of memory diskdump 1 From pressing the NMI switch until the completion of collecting dump and the server startup About 10 minutes It may take shorter time depending on the mounted memory amount Storing Dump File Quick Dump When there is not enough space for storing the dump file Quick Dump deletes other dump files and stores the new one Note Save necessary dump files to other storage device in order to avoid the files to be deleted before the storage run out of space diskdump When there is not enough space for storing the dump file dump is not collected Note Store necessary dump files on other storage device and
82. to mount it again When mounting CPU IO module and at a failover errors such as buffer I O error may be recorded but there is no problem on operation as they are specifications of the server After the failover device name of the CD ROM drive may be changed Ex from scd0 to scd1 that phenomenon is due to the specifications of the server and does not affect the operation In such a case specify the changed device name for mounting the media Fail to access the hard disk O Is the hard disk applicable to the server Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed Ol Isthe hard disk properly installed Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle The hard disk is not connected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed see Chapter 8 When the hard disk is properly installed the drive power LED for the hard disk is lit while the server 1s powered Fail to start the OS O Isa floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Take out the floppy disk and restart the server O Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM or the other bootable CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Take out the CD ROM and restart the server L1 Is the OS damaged Use the recovery process of the OS to attempt to recover the damaged OS O Isreset performed by the boot monitoring function For the following cases boot monitoring function needs to be disabled for NEC Express5800 ft series To disable i
83. tool Refer to BMC configuration manual The message above may appear in a different screen during POST with the NEC logo shown and paused In that case press the Esc key to display the diagnosis screen to check whether or not the above message is shown If a different error message is shown refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting How to make initial settings Either wait for a while after the above message is shown or press the F1 key to precede POST Start up the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and select initialize Remote Management Card from the Tool menu By doing so information specific to each server will be written in When writing the information is completed the following message appears Press any key to reboot the server for use Strike a key when ready TIPS Running the initialize Remote Management Card resets the AC LINK setting Server AC LINK of the BIOS setup to the initial value Last State If you have changed the value you will need to set it again 4 46 System Configuration Setting a Management PC The following provides management PC considerations to connect the server and a management PC Setting Your Browser Configure the following Enable SSL Supported browsers The following browsers are supported Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 Netscape 7 0 Mozilla 1 6 Java2 Runtime Environment Java2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1 4 2 04 or later i
84. use configuration jumper pins jumper switches located inside of the server The jumper switches are found on the motherboard in a CPU IO module See the figure below IMPORTANT Do not change any other jumper switch settings Any improper change may cause the server to fail or malfunction Pins for BMC configuration Pins for protecting clearing CMOS data Use clips on pins 11 and 12 2 4 6 8 10 12 Nop 6s ola Pins for protecting clearing password System Configuration 4 39 m Pins for protecting clearing the password Short circuiting the two pins Clears the password Opening the two pins Protects the password factory set W Pins for protecting clearing the CMOS data Short circuiting the two pins Clears the CMS data Opening two pins Protects the CMOS data factory set The following describe the clearing procedure WARNING G A Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of death or serious personal injury See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1 m Do not disassemble repair or alter the server How to Clear CMOS 1 Power off the NEC Express5800 ft series and unplug the both power cords 2 Remove the both CPU IO modules 1 and 42 from the NEC Express5800 ft series see Removing CPU IO Module on page 8 17 3 Make
85. will hang It may take time to complete the initialization due to temporary high load on the system In this case wait for the system load become low enough before restarting SNMP Service SCSI Status on a Data Viewer Unknown is always displayed for the following items B Serial Number Firmware Revision and ROMBIOS Revision in General of SCSI Adapter B Reassign Block Count and Reassign Block threshold in General of SCSI Slot SCSI Status while IO Module is Starting or being Stopped While an IO module is starting or being stopped the status of SCSI adapters SCSI bus SCSI enclosure SCSI slots and mirror disks temporarily indicates an undefined status Once the module is started or stopped the status will return to normal Installing and Using Utilities 5 23 Status of SCSI Slots and Mirrored Disks at High Load When the system load is high the status of SCSI slots and mirror disks may not be obtained and incorrect status may be displayed temporarily SCSI Slot Indication when a Disk Fails When a disk which has failed before is mounted the SCSI slot status becomes Broken The status changes from Broken when a mirror volume is created on the disk or any mirror volume is resynchronized Monitoring NEC Storage NEC ESMPRO Agent Linux does not monitor the failure status in NEC Storage If you go to Data Viewer and select ESMPRO File System the File Sy
86. you are using the rack model gt Install the front bezel and lock it with the security key 12 See RAID CONFIGURATION WHEN DISKS ARE ADDED on page 8 10 to configure RAID 8 8 System Upgrade Removing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Follow the procedure below to remove the hard disk IMPORTANT Make sure to read ANTI STATIC MEASURES and PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE before starting installing or removing options 1 Shutdown Linux The system turns off automatically 2 Disconnect all the power cords from the power outlet 3 Ifyou are using the tower model Unlock the front door lock with the security key and open the front door lt If you are using the rack model Unlock the front bezel with the security key and detach it 4 Push the lever of the hard disk to unlock the handle 5 Hold the handle and hard disk to pull them off 6 Install the dummy tray in an empty tray according to procedures described in Installation Make sure to install the dummy slot in the empty slot to improve the cooling effect within the device System Upgrade 8 9 Replacing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Follow the procedure below to remove the failed hard disk If the hard disk fails it should be replaced with new device with the server powered on IMPORTANT Make sure to read ANTI STATIC MEASURES and PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE before starting installing or removing options You can replace disks du
87. zin wj fen pant I Sorry Mens The screen shows information on a pair of hard disks that make up a mirror It does not show information based on volumes ex Volume A Volume B 5 36 Installing and Using Utilities 5 Recovery from a hard disk failure If a hard disk breaks the broken disk must be replaced immediately This section describes alert reports and status shown by the Data Viewer while disks are replaced to restore mirroring 1 Detecting problem of a hard disk See 1 Confirm of hard disk failure above 2 Removing the hard disk Disconnect the hard disk with the problem At this time NEC ESMPRO Agent reports the following alert to manager And icons related to the hard disk with problem change the state of warning in the data viewer Since the hard disk has been removed the status of the SCSI slot will be EMPTY peas 4 General sume Report Status SCSI slot of built in HDD warning From SERVER B1 mar_SERVER B1 Address 192 168 0 137 Received Thursday December 15 2005 11 52 AM Generated Thursday December 15 2005 11 52 AM your time x Alert generation time Thursday December 15 2005 f 4 11 52 AM 08 00 Status of the SCSI Slot ID 41 1 has changed from t Action In case of empty insert the pair HDD and construct mirrorred volumes with the Disk Management In case of Syncing wait for a while until mirroring is completed Invoke associa
88. 0 x 600 24bpp 0x31A 1280 x1024 16bpp 0x31B 1280 x1024 24bpp It is recommended to set 0x317 0x318 or 0x323 If other value is specified and the monitor does not support it the screen may not be displayed properly 3 Restart the server Linux Setup and Operation 3 11 Notes X server that supports the ft feature always operates in the same video mode as the console The Xrandr feature is not supported You cannot change screen resolution from X server IPMI Management Utility cannot be used OpenIPMI cannot be used For using X on the console run the system at the run level 5 and perform graphical logon If X is not started at the system startup run level 3 log on as root and enter init 5 to the command line on thte text console to start X 3 12 Linux Setup and Operation DUMP INITIALIZATION 1 Checking partition for diskdump 1 1 Check var crash Dump file storage area df Filesystem 1K blocks Used Available Use Mounted on dev md1 40313912 5152136 33113896 14 dev md0 194366 17729 166602 10 boot none 1035356 0 1035356 0 dev shm dev md3 10080364 1089312 8478988 12 var crash Note Unless you have created var crash partition it does not exist The dump file will be created on the partition that the root file system exists 1 2 Check diskdump partition Dump file creation area fdisk dev md Run p print the partition table When HAS is loaded run it at
89. 1 Installing and Using Utilities 5 31 Monitoring SCSI Enclosure To monitor the SCSI enclosure see the SCSI enclosure tree To see the information on the SCSI enclosure tree select SCSI enclosure of the ft tree You can see the following information of the SCSI enclosure from the SCSI enclosure tree m General Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI enclosure to be viewed IMPORTANT You need to be aware that PCI modules SCSI adapters SCSI buses and modules under the SCSI enclosure have impact on each other For details see Impact of Module Status Changes described above EE imi xi OF Pe D t assieme a mj aj aim a SI we i Ld Lowe Voltage Owerad Pehgwe Cong ict dues OE reni Tor eie ress PI He s M ro m SCSI Slot General Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI slot to be viewed EI alaiz POUR dem De oe esee 5770 s m II ia imi ai zi vel xd Pj enter Uroy exo Dei unter o Fenner Block Cam Usk biach resold Umno Pah rt Pa ante Tow Cb Re W O M jue HH Gel foret ree Pe Mi ond eres BB rons IMPORTANT You need to be aware of the status of hard disk during the mirror creation For details see Status Color after Mounting a Hard Disk in Supplement 5 32 Installing and Using Utilities Monitoring Mirror Disk To monitor the mir
90. 2 168 1 1 Ll ocon alala j amp amp Module o administrator aj 9 Q Ready B Bi B Primary IMPORTANT NEVER open the remote KVM console when you log on to the BMC from a local console If you do so data entry from the keyboard or mouse becomes disabled CHECK You cannot use the KVM console on the secondary side Use it on the primary side Items on the remote KVM console window o Oo 66006060690 D Ait win cman E 1 2 and 3 are special icons Use them when you want to operate special keys 4 Virtual keyboard icon use this icon when you want to enter a special key other than those mentioned above System Configuration 4 57 5 Screen refresh icon use this icon to refresh the window 6 KVM properties icon 7 Enlarge icon use this icon to enlarge the view 8 Shrink icon use this icon to reduce the view 9 Equal size icon use this icon to display images in the same magnification 10 Window size icon use this icon to adjust the window size to the screen size 11 KVM indicator showing information including resolution 12 Remote KVM console screen on which the server screen is shown IMPORTANT When you operate Shift Caps Lock or Num Lock on the remote KVM console window such action may not be reflected in the Shift Caps Lock or Num Lock status of the management PC LED Likewise on the server the Caps Lock or Num Lock st
91. 4 2 rerit reae eder iin etg eter eene neces 7 36 COLLECTION OF TROUBLE LOGS 00 0 7 37 Collection of syslog ee deve te eee de dde er e e eee eei dents 7 37 Collection of System Information es 7 37 Collection of the Memory DuUmp Ne 7 38 Backup of IPMI Information scisco ioiii nennen nennen enne nennen nnns 7 39 Chapter 8 System Upgrade nn 8 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS en y cr e re RE ERR REN WERT IS 8 2 ANTESTATIC ME XSURES m ertt ettet enn Deere en OPE ex D PRESE 8 3 PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE 0 0000000 0 ne 8 4 3 5 INCH HARD DISK DRIVE rec gor e e OTHO RR e RO DOE dore 8 5 Installing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Ne 8 6 Removing 3 5 inch Hard Disk DTIVe ene 8 8 Replacing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive nn 8 9 RAID CONFIGURATION WHEN DISKS ARE ADDED eres 8 10 DPD SETH AS VICE M EET 8 13 Installing 5 25 inch EVE e a de ara aiaa 8 14 Removing 5 25 inch Device Ne 8 15 CPU IO Module E em RR MR n f teo 8 16 Precautions cioe de tmd item e o ir t D Rede e aed 2 8 16 Removing CPU IO Module Ne 8 17 Installing CPU IO Modu le nennen nennen nnne 8 19 DIMM ehe etes i ER eT mer ecd 8 20 vii Installing DIMM ne ente e e RE id dee i denn 8 22 Removing DIMM ee ie eoe Ue eie e erede ie ete eines 8 23 Replacing DIMM ee e Re ei e RU t E Ve e eee e ea 8 24 PROCESSOR CPU 4er eie Rep ie eg He OH He rgo 8 25 Installing CPU Model with Heat Sink essen 8 26 Removing CPU Model with Heat Sink s
92. 80 Check the system clock once in a month It is recommended to operate the system clock using a time server NTP server if it is installed on the system which requires high level of time accuracy If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by though the system clock adjustment 1s performed contact your sales agent System Configuration 4 11 Processor Settings Phoenix BIOS Setup Ltility Processor Speed Setting Set the processor MTRR register continuousor Processor 1 CPUID DF43 discrete forcache Processor 1 L2 Cache 2048 KB setting Processor2 CPUID ORS Processor L2 Cache 2048 KB Hyper Threading Technology Enabled Execute Disable Bt Disabled Continuous F1 Help T Sdect tem E Ex Bit gt Sect hlenu Enter Select Change lues Subtufenu FQ Setup Defaults FiO Save and Bat When you select Processor Settings in the Main menu the following screen appears Refer to the table below for information on options Option Parameter Description Processor Speed Setting Displays the speed of the processor Processor 1 CPUID CPUID When the processor 1 in installed its CPU ID is displayed If the system supports Hyper Threading Technology the ID of a physical processor but not logical processor appears here Processor 1 L2 Cache Displays the cache size of the L2 of the processor 1 Processor 2 CPUID CPUID Not Installe
93. AN port types When this LED illuminates in amber the port is operating on 1000BASE T When the LED illuminates in green the port is operating on I100BASE TX Power Supply Unit LED Power supply units located at the rear have power supply unit LEDs When power is supplied to a power supply unit by connecting a power cord to the AC inlet of the power supply unit its LED blinks in green When the server is powered on the LED illuminates in green If the LED does not illuminate in green or illuminates blinks in amber the power supply unit may be failing Contact your service agent and ask for replacement of the power supply unit Cooling Fan LED Cooling fan units located at the rear have cooling fan LEDs While a cooling fan unit is working normally its LED illuminates in green When the LED illuminates in amber the fan unit may have a problem Contact you service agent and ask for the replacement of the cooling fan unit 2 28 General Description BASIC OPERATION This section describes basic operation procedures of NEC Express5800 ft series Security lock front door lock for tower model The security lock located at the front of this server locks the front door Open the front door to power on off the server operate the CD ROM drive or 5 25 inch device or install remove a hard disk drive on a 3 5 inch disk bay or CPU IO module IMPORTANT The security lock can be unlocked only by the security keys shipped together Some
94. Adapter ID n m o SCSI Adapter contains the following information Item Description Status Status of the SCSI adapter SCSI Bus ID n m o p The following information is displayed for SCSI Bus Item Description Status Status of the SCSI bus Primary or Secondary The following information is displayed for SCSI Bus Item Description Change Makes the current bus the primary SCSI bus For your maintenance personnel The execution of each button may take a few minutes Wait for a while to update the display and check the module status Ethernet Board ID n m o Port p The following information is displayed for Ethernet Board Item Description Status Status of the Ethernet board BMC The following information is displayed for Firmware Item Description Active Status Current status of the firmware IPMI Version IPMI version Firmware Revision Firmware revision SDR Version SDR version SEL Version SEL version SCSI Enclosure The following information is displayed for SCSI Enclosure Item Description Device SCSI enclosure name Status Status of the SCSI enclosure 5 46 Installing and Using Utilities SCSI Enclosure ID n The following information is displayed for SCSI Enclosure Item Description Status Status of the SCSI enclosure The following information is display
95. BIOS Information on a Data Viewer or by clicking a CPU module and clicking BIOS Information on Server Maintenance Utility may not be displayed correctly In such a case display the BIOS information on a Data Viewer by clicking ESMMIB BIOS Ethernet Adapters You Do Not Use If an Ethernet adapter is not used not connected to cable set it to Disable in Network Connections from Control Panel If an Ethernet adapter you are about to disable has dual LAN settings AFT function remove the dual LAN settings before disable it Monitoring in Sleep State NEC ESMPRO Manager cannot monitor the NEC ESMPRO Agent machine in the sleep state system standby or system halt state While NEC ESMPRO Manager monitors server shutdown the relevant NEC ESMPRO Agent machine may be entered into the sleep state If so the report server access disabled is issued and the status color of the server icon becomes gray This cannot indicate whether the NEC ESMPRO Agent machine is shut down or entered into the sleep state Keep these in mind when operating the system where systems to be monitored may enter the sleep state Hang of SNMP Service SNMP Service has a module called SNMP Extended Agent This module may be registered when you install some software that uses SNMP Service If you start SNMP Service SNMP Extended Agent is also loaded at the initialization However if the initialization 1s not completed within a specified period SNMP Service
96. BMC firmware is to be updated IMPORTANT Contact your maintenance personnel for the update of the BMC firmware Component BMC firmware update Remote Local BMC When an update to new firmware is When an update to new firmware is required required Executable in the following module Executable in the following module state state this can be viewed on this can be viewed on Server Maintenance manager screen Utility screen Duplex Duplex Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility Not support Installing and Using Utilities 5 71 Procedure of Update from NEC ESMPRO Manager Menu Update firmware in the procedure as follows 1 Select Tools BMC FW Update Utility from the Operation Window s menu The BMC FW Update dialog box appears aec n upses Um FS 2 Enter the device name and click OK BMC FW Update O x The Execution Check dialog box appears cp E Cancel About SERVER B1 3 Store the firmware in the directory specified by Location Data fils for the update are located below System The storage area may be modified See Changing Update Data Storage Destination described later Click OK to proceed with BMC firmware update BMC FW update status 3 BMC FW update in progress Please wait 4 Click OK Run fi
97. Brean candens Juro Sth Press the Dup Swatch button to sea the bows amesa For Help press FE Mi Ned wanna B irona Update screen of CPU module CPU Module Update Select Specify the file path to update enter the directory 24 xl where the firmware to update is stored the directory you Select a method For updating wrote down in step 1 and the file name of the image data Copy online BIOS image to Offline into the input box and click the Execute button Speci Type the location of the firmware zi Cancel Help The server will update the firmware The update result can be confirmed by the state on the target component screen indication of Firmware update completed The result of the update processing 1s reported by the server as an alert After the BIOS for a single CPU module is completed click the Jump Switch button The module completely updated is started and the active module is stopped The result of switching boards is reported as an alert Switching boards should be performed only by Firmware Update The keyboard and mouse may not function for a few minutes while switching boards If the module is not switched successfully you can continue to the next step by clicking 5 62 Installing and Using Utilities Down of the module you want to stop Click Diagnostics on the Maintenance screen of the other PCI module stopped Start the other stopped module
98. C ESMPRO Agent and the notes on their operations These applications are necessary for continuous operation of NEC Express5800 ft series Overview NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent are the server management software provided for the stable operation of a server system and effective system operations They can manage the configuration information and operating status of server resources to prevent server faults from occurring If a server fault occurs they detect the fault to notify the system Administrator of the occurrence This enables the system Administrator to take appropriate action against faults m Importance of server management Constantly stable operation and less management workload are keywords in server management Stable operation of server Shutdown of a server immediately leads the customer to lose business opportunities and profits This requires servers to always operate in their perfect state If a fault Occurs in a server it is necessary to detect the occurrence as soon as possible make clear the cause and take appropriate action The shorter the time taken from the occurrence of a fault to the recovery from the fault is the smaller the loss of profits and or costs 1s Loadreduction of server management The server management requires many jobs In particular if the system becomes large or remote servers are used required jobs increase further The reduction of the load of the server man
99. C Express5800 ft series and NEC ESMPRO Manager For details on the operating environment the settings required before the setup and the installation procedure see the separate volume User s Guide Setup Device ID in Alert Report Some NEC Express5800 ft series reports use unique device IDs which correspond to the devices listed in the table below as the device identification information 320Fa L 320Fa LR models Device name Device ID CPU module 0 0 DIMM slot A1 on CPU module 0 0 0 0 DIMM slot B1 on CPU module 0 0 0 1 DIMM slot A2 on CPU module 0 0 0 2 DIMM slot B2 on CPU module 0 0 0 3 DIMM slot A3 on CPU module 0 0 0 4 DIMM slot B3 on CPU module 0 0 0 5 CPU 1 on CPU module 0 0 0 20 CPU 2 on CPU module 0 0 0 21 PCI module 0 0 10 PCI slot 1 on PCI module 0 0 10 1 PCI slot 2 on PCI module 0 0 10 2 Slot 1 of riser card on PCI module 0 0 10 3 Slot 2 of riser card on PCI module 0 0 10 4 PCI controller 1 on PCI module 0 0 10 100 PCI controller 2 on PCI module 0 0 10 101 IO hub on PCI module 0 0 10 102 Display controller on PCI module 0 0 10 103 SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 0 0 10 104 SCSI bus 1 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 0 0 10 104 0 SCSI bus 2 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 0 0 10 104 1 Ethernet adapter on PCI module 0 0 10 105 CPU module 1 1 1 DIMM slot A1 on CPU module 1 1 1 0 DIMM slot B1 on CPU module 1 1 1 1 DIMM slot A2 on CPU module 1 1 1 2 DIMM slot B2 on CPU module 1 1
100. C Express5800 series systems The acquired information can be viewed at any point through NEC ESMPRO Manager Collective management of distributed servers NEC ESMPRO Manager provides the GUI interface that allows servers distributed on the network to be managed efficiently 5 10 Installing and Using Utilities Detection of Server Fault NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent detect errors causing faults to occur at an early stage and notify Administrators of fault information real time m Early detection of error If a fault occurs NEC ESMPRO Agent detects the fault and reports the occurrence of the fault to NEC ESMPRO Manager alert report NEC ESMPRO Manager displays the received alert in the alert viewer and also changes the status colors of the server and server component in which the fault occurs This allows you to identify the fault at a glance Further checking the content of the fault and the countermeasures you can take appropriate action for the fault as soon as possible m Types of reported faults The table below lists the typical faults reported by NEC ESMPRO Agent Component Reported information CPU e CPU load is over the threshold e CPU degrading etc Memory ECC 1 bit error detection etc Power supply e Voltage lowering e Power failure etc Temperature Temperature increase in cabinet etc Fan Fan failure decrease in the number of revolutions etc Storage File s
101. CT ANE rns BRA HS aL he DURO AS TERE Eee RAE DUC EH AC Trademarks and Patents NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and NEC ESMPRO are trademarks of NEC Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Avocent and Dambrackas Video Compression DVC are trademarks or registered trademarks of Avocent Corporation in the United States and other countries Mozilla is a trademark of Mozilla Foundation Netscape is a trademark or registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries Java is a trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linux Torvalds Red Hat and RPM are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the United States and other countries All other product brand or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respect
102. Count 3 times M3ES Retry Interval 60 sec Hl 1 Specify the address of the SMTP server You can enter the IP address or host name 2 Specify the port number of the SMTP server 3 Specify the number to be made if sending a mail has failed 4 Specify the time period in seconds to wait for next retry If you click Default the default values for SMTP port number number of retries and retry interval appears It is recommended to use the default values unless you have specific reasons IMPORTANT This card does not support SMTP authentication SMTP AUTH 4 74 System Configuration Option of E Mail Alert Settings Basic Message SMTP Option Mail Attached Information vi Product Name vi BMC URL vi IP Address vj BMC FQDN vi Event Time vi LCD Message vi SEL Dump Data v BMC FW Rev E Settings Time Zone 1 Specify information to be attached to the body of alert mail The information you specify here will be contained in the body of alert mail with the message you specified in the message box in the message tab Product Information Product name code number of the server IP Address IP address of the BMC Event Time Time that the event occurred SEL Dump Data Data representing system event logs SEL in the hexadecimal format BMC URL URL of the RMC logon page BMC FQDN Full domain name of the B
103. DianaScope store the settings required to connect to NEC DianaScope in media such as a floppy disk before this operation and configure the settings after the operation again Use NEC DianaScope Agent or NEC EXPRESSBUILDER system management function to configure and save the BMC settings 4 44 System Configuration REMOTE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION 320Fa L and 320Fa LR models are equipped with the optional card N8815 001A ft Remote Management Card on the server By connecting to a network via their management LAN port BMC Baseboard Management Controller an LSI for system management installed on the server allows remote monitoring and controlling of the server such as keyboard video and mouse KVM control over management network Network Default Values The following are default values to connect the server to a network IP Address 192 168 1 1 User Name administrator Password None Host Name ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX E The host name above is the host name used for auto registering with a DNS server using DHCP functions XXXXXXXXXXXX is the MAC address assigned to each management card The MAC address can be found on the label attached to the rear or the card or Server System Management Sub menu Selections Primary BMC MAC Address Secondary BMC MAC Address on the BIOS Set UP screen IMPORTANT The default IP address of the management LAN is 192 168 1 1 for both CPU IO module 0 and CPU IO module 1 Therefore the ser
104. EC ESMPRO Manager Perform the procedure below before replacement of a component 1 2 3 Select the target component in the ft tree Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen Click the Clear button in the MTBF Clear of the target component The MTBF clearing result can be confirmed by the MTBF information on the target component screen The result of the MTBF clearing operation is reported by the server as an alert CHECK m At this point the State display on the target component screen is not changed m Ifthe MTBF clear is executed in the following conditions diagnostics of the CPU IO modules are automatically performed after MTBF clear The target CPU IO module is turned on Both of the target CPU module and IO module are stopped Start the component CHECK At this point the State display on the target component screen is changed Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager rre Urn Cn hes eloveuwjieni met o Tee of intr tan ent E OE Maintenance screen of IO module PCI module Maintenance 5 56 Installing and Using Utilities Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility Perform the procedure below before replacement of a module 1 Select the target module from the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility The screen of the target module appears Check the current state of the target module with the LEDs Select Clear
105. ER switch This switch is used to power on off the server The POWER LED illuminates and the server is powered on when this switch is pressed once see page 2 30 The power supply is turned off when the switch is pressed once again see page 2 31 Pressing this button for 4 or more seconds shuts down the server forcefully see page 4 37 DUMP NMI switch This switch is used to perform memory dump USB1 connector This connector is used for connecting devices supporting the USB1 1 interface Hard disk drive bays These bays are used to install hard disk drives see page 8 6 The numbers following represent SCSI IDs CD ROM drive This device is used to read data from CD ROMs General Description 2 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 CPU IO module 0 This is a module with a set of CPU processor memory DIMM PCI board and cooling fan unit see page 2 18 CPU IO module 1 This is a module with a set of CPU processor memory DIMM PCI board and cooling fan see page 2 18 Module POWER switch This switch is used to control power supply to a module The switch is pressed when removing a failed module Module POWER LED See page 2 25 Module FAULT LED See page 2 25 Processor error LED See page 2 25 TO error LED See page 2 25 Memory group 3 error LED See page 2 25 Fan2 error LED See page 2 25 Fan 1 e
106. Event ID 800000cc 800000d2 hasftctl related logs are recorded in the system event log The following message may be recorded in the system event log This log does not indicate an event that impacts operations This message informs that the CPU modules are no longer in the duplex mode However dual configuration is to be set to the CPU modules again so this warning does not indicate any impact on the system operation Source hasftctl Type Warning EventID 800704B2 Description The driver failed the fast re sync function of the CPU module Source hasftctl Type Warning EventID 80070DAC Description The error occurred on the CPU module Source hasftctl Type Warning EventID 80070fa0 Description The error occurred on the CPU module Source hasftctl Type Warning EventID 40071209 Description CPU is not doubled 7 32 Troubleshooting Syslog A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response is recorded in the syslog The following logs may be recorded while the system is running These logs are recorded if the software that has acccess to BMC could not receive any response from BMA within a certain time period However the contents of these logs does not influence the system A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response Process Although Primary BMC is ready A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response Process Secondary BMC is still running I O error is recorded in the log
107. Examples ss es 4 0 Menu and Parameter Descriptions Ne 4 9 SESLBIOS ER 4 30 FORCED SHUTDOWN AND CLEAR 0 ne a e nennen inneren enne 4 37 Forced Shutd Ome na ette gem ttm ner doute ile oe Hetero tuens ets 4 37 Cleat CMOS Password issu consi rio ui Poder att hdi ate eos Reate t ette 4 38 How to Clear PasSwotds a a ro ntt bt abo feo de 4 41 Remote Management fanctign eene enne enne nnne nennen 4 44 Network Default Valdes 0 ener rnnt 4 44 Settings on the SeTVeT enne enne enne entren eren nnne rennen enn nnne 4 44 Initial Settings on the Server ccceccceeseseccesecesecesecseecseeeseeeseeeeeeeeesceeseceseeeeeneeneeeeenseenseeaes 4 45 Setting a Management PC Ne 4 46 Using Remote Management Ne 4 48 Troubleshooting ni ue S e RS RU Ae hele do 4 79 Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities eee 5 1 NEC EXPRESSBUIDEDBR me nti t EHE E EE REREREER EE N LEEERE EE IRSE 5 2 Start Mens HD 5 2 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu e eeeeseseeeeeeee iin enne tnn A entente nennen 5 4 Master Control Mel eneee tto pi egere tiere ae bei voe D a a aepo ed xut pe tu 5 7 NEC ESMPRO Agent and Matiaget ee 5 8 OVVIE Wos i A EAE E EA AAE EEE EASE LE E 5 8 NEC ESMPRO ACOM canine a E E eee E EE E EN E EDU Eee Ugus 5 16 NECESMPRO Mana teiue ie aE E KE E AES E a a a 5 24 Server Maintenance Utility m teet rettet ec ee t a 5 40 Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft Series Ne 5 48 NO 5
108. Express5800 ft series server module it will transparently use a redundant module of the failed module This feature maintains data and user access without losing application service Automatic reconfiguration When the failed module restarts after the trouble is corrected NEC Express5800 ft series will perform reconfiguration automatically and if necessary resynchronize the affected modules Reconfiguration can include CPU processing e g CPU memory server s operating system and related applications and system data stored on the hard disks In most cases NEC Express5800 ft series automatically restores redundancy of the server modules after recovery General Description 2 5 Local and remote management NEC Express5800 ft series uses NEC ESMPRO as a server management tool This tool uses a GUI that enables monitoring and setting of NEC Express5800 ft series NEC ESMPRO can be used both locally and remotely on work station PCs or server PCs Syslog function When a trouble or other event is detected on NEC Express5800 ft series they will be recorded in syslog In service repairing You can repair or replace a failed module even if NEC Express5800 ft series is operating 2 6 General Description NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS Names and functions of components are shown below 1 Front door The cover to protect devices in the front in daily operations this cover can be locked by the security key shipped to
109. Function to monitor disk array system of LSI Logic Corporation Other O Supports OS stall monitoring by Watch Dog Timer O Supported A Partly supported x Not supported Installing and Using Utilities 5 13 Monitoring of NEC Express5800 ft series NEC Express5800 ft series is a fault tolerant system It can continue the operation even if a major component fails NEC Express5800 ft series improves the system availability with the hardware NEC ESMPRO and system software functions If a major component fails the NEC ESMPRO fault report function can notify the system Administrator of the occurrence of the fault In addition the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager can monitor the system status and also identify the failed component NEC ESMPRO provides several maintenance functions such as the update of F W and BIOS in the NEC Express5800 ft series in the online state in which the system continues the operation but the components used to update F W or BIOS is suspended and the suspension of a specific component The table below lists the NEC Express5800 ft series management tasks using NEC ESMPRO and system functions NEC ESMPRO function or tool NEC Express5800 ft series management task on managed NEC Express5800 ft series NEC ESMPRO function or tool on management manager Monitoring of major component states NEC ESMPRO Manager data viewer Diagnosis and start stop of major components and F W
110. Harvest memory dump of the current system without stopping it Do not start or stop the module while producing a dump 1 The execution of each button may take a few minutes Wait for a while to update the display and check the module status 2 This system performs diagnostics to both CPU module and PCI module on the same board Execute diagnostics from a PCI module 3 These operations cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating firmware Wait until such processing is finished to perform the operations in the table 5 44 Installing and Using Utilities PCI Module ID n m PCI Module contains the following information The MTBF information is displayed only when the MTBF Info gt button is pressed Item Description Status Status of the PCI module MTBF Information contains the following information Item Description Type Monitoring state of MTBF Use Threshold MTBF is calculated at a fault occurrence The device is stopped when the calculated value is lower than the threshold Never Restart Always stops the device at a fault occurrence Always Restart Always restarts the device at a fault occurrence Threshold Threshold of MTBF Current Current MTBF value Faults Number of faults Time of last fault Time of the last fault When there is none o is displayed Diagnostics Information contains the following information
111. I Slot ID 0 10 100 E PCI Slot 1D 0 10 101 PCI Slot 1D 0 10 102 PCI Slot 1D 0 10 103 PCI Slot D 0 10 104 m PCI Slot 1D 0 10 105 SCSI Adapter ID 0 10 104 m mc BB Ethernet Board 1D 0 10 105 Porto Ethernet Board 10 0 10 105 Porti amp ff module 1 H E SCSI Enclosure Mirror For Help press Fi Noma Warning Mill Abnormal 7 Use Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager to identify the failed CPU 1 2 Remove the CPU IO module referring to page 8 17 3 Replace the CPU 4 Install the CPU IO module referring to page 8 19 The installed CPU IO module will start automatically System Upgrade 8 31 ft Remote Management Card ft Remote Management Card function is compatible only with 320Fa L 320Fa LR models An ft Remote Management Card needs to be installed on each CPU IO module in order to use ft Remote Management Cards IMPORTANT m Even when the server is powered off the POWER LED is off the power is supplied to the server if the power cords are connected Therefore before adding any ft Remote Management Card you must remove all power cords from the AC inlets If ft Remote Management Cards are installed with the power cords connected the server and the ft Remote Management Cards may be damaged m ft Remote Management Cards can only be installed into the dedicated slots If they are installed into other slots such as slots for PCI EXPRESS the server and the ft Remote Management Car
112. Installing and Using Utilities 5 53 Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility Start 1 Stop Select the target component from the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility The screen of the target component appears Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs Select Up of the target component A certain time is required for the start The start result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component The result of the start operation is registered in the syslog Stop before replacing components Select the target component from the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility The screen of the target component appears Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs Select Down of the target component A certain time is required for the start The start result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component The result of the start operation is registered in the syslog Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility Main window CPU Module screen 5 54 Installing and Using Utilities Check and Clear of MTBF Information The MTBF information of a component can be viewed or cleared initialized The server manages the MTBF mean time between failures of each component If a fault occurs in a component the server series calculates the MTBF of the component again If the calculated value is lower than the pre defined threshold the server disables the compon
113. L1 Is SCSI controller including options configuration correct If the sever has an optional SCSI controller board and SCSI devices are hooked up to the server make correct settings by the SCSI controller board s SCSI BIOS utility For details see manuals included with the SCSI controller board O Is SCSI device configuration correct If external SCSI devices are connected to the server you need to make settings of SCSI ID and terminal resistance For details see manuals included with the SCSI device Does the SCSI driver recognize the target devices Execute the following command to check if the SCSI driver recognizes the target devices gt cat proc scsi scsi O Isa driver which supports the SCSI device loaded to kernel Execute the following command to check if a driver which supports the SCSI device is loaded to kernel gt Ismod CPUs not in Duplex mode Check if the memory configuration is correct Check if third party CPUs or memory DIMM are used BlOSes not in Duplex mode due to differences between both modules Check if the setting of Automatic firmware update is disabled on the System Setting screen on the main window of Server Maintenance Utility If the setting of Automatic firmware update is enabled and modules are remounted BIOSes are automatically updated and duplicated At this time 1t is recommended to reduce the load of the system as much as possible D
114. LED is illuminating you cannot remove the module Module FAULT LED This LED illuminates in amber when the CPU IO module has a problem Processor Error LED This LED illuminates in amber when the processor of the CPU IO module has a problem O Unit Error LED This LED illuminates in amber when the I O of the CPU IO module has a problem Memory Group 1 Error LED This LED illuminates in amber when the memory group 1 A1 and B1 DIMM slots of the CPU IO module has a problem Memory Group 2 Error LED This LED illuminates in amber when the memory group 2 A2 and B2 DIMM slots of the CPU IO module has a problem Memory Group 3 Error LED This LED illuminates in amber when the memory group 3 A3 and B3 DIMM slots of the CPU IO module has a problem Fan 1 Error LED This LED illuminates in amber when the cooling fan unit in the CPU IO module has a problem Fan 2 Error LED This LED illuminates in amber when the cooling fan unit located at the rear of this server has a problem 2 26 General Description Power Supply Unit Error LED This LED illuminates in amber when the corresponding power supply unit located at the rear of the server has a problem Voltage Error LED This LED illuminates in amber when the voltage of the CPU IO module is not within an appropriate range Heart Warning LED This LED illuminates in amber when the temperature in the CPU IO module is not within an appropriate range HCS 1 Error LED Unav
115. MC LCD Message LDC message on the server at the time of event occurrence BMC FW Rev Revision information of the BMC firmware SDR PIA 2 Used in the date filed of the mail header of alert mail System Configuration 4 75 Firmware Update You can update applets KVM firmware BMC firmware sensor device information SDR and platform information PIA Starting up the firmware update window Network Status Host information LED Power Controli Window HA Status xi 192 168 1 1 a exo Mi O B amp Module 0 administrator il 9 Ready E53 Bi Primary When you click the icon to start up firmware update on the control panel each pieces of revision information is loaded from the BMC to display the following firmware update window BMC firmware Platform Information PIA sensor Data Record SDR Cancel If you click Cancel the firmware update window closes without making any changes The following pages provide step by step instructions for update 4 76 System Configuration Loading update data files When you click the icon for adding update files p the window to select a file appears Look In C MyDocuments e cx B8 2 3 ABMC RBF 3 ABMCFW bhx 3 gngo006 bin 3 PlA0101 hex 3 spR0101 cfg File Name Files of Type All update files v
116. Ms CPU IO module 0 This is a module with a set of CPU processor memory DIMM PCI board and cooling fan unit see page 2 24 CPU IO module 1 This is a module with a set of CPU processor memory DIMM PCI board and cooling fan see page 2 24 Module POWER switch This switch is used to control power supply to a module The switch is pressed when removing a failed module Module POWER LED See page 2 25 Module FAULT LED See page 2 25 Processor error LED See page 2 25 I O error LED See page 2 25 Memory group 3 error LED See page 2 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Fan 2 error LED See page 2 25 Fan 1 error LED See page 2 25 Memory group 2 error LED See page 2 25 Voltage error LED See page 2 26 Memory group 1 error LED See page 2 25 HCS2 error LED See page 2 26 Power supply unit error LED See page 2 26 HCSI error LED See page 2 26 Heat warning LED See page 2 26 General Description 2 13 2 14 General Description 1 2 3 CD ROM Drive Status LED An LED that stays on while the loaded CD ROM is accessed CD tray eject button A button for ejecting the CD tray Manual release hole When the eject button does not work insert a metal pin into this hole to forcefully eject the CD tray General Description 2 15 Rear View achat CU TOR AY A Y LA Wa 5 O TOROS
117. NEC Express5800 Series N8800 090F EXP320B NEC Express5800 320Fa L N8800 091F EXP320A NEC Express5800 320Fa LR User s Guide N8800 090F EXP320B NEC Express5800 320Fa L N8800 091F EXP320A NEC Express5800 320Fa LR User s Guide 2nd Edition 9 2006 856 126408 101 01 PROPRIETARY NOTICE AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMER The information disclosed in this document including all designs and related materials is the valuable property of NEC Corporation NEC and or its licensors NEC and or its licensors as appropriate reserve all patent copyright and other proprietary rights to this document including all design manufacturing reproduction use and sales rights thereto except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others The NEC product s discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product However actual performance of each such product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration customer data and operator control Since implementation by customers of each product may vary the suitability of specific product configurations and applications must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by NEC To allow for design and specification improvements the information in this document is subject to change at any time without notice Reproduction of this document or portions thereof without prior written approval of NEC is prohib
118. P Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 100 ok Cancel 1 The MAC address of the BMC 2 Lets you choose whether or not to acquire an IP address automatically by DHCP 3 Lets you make the IP address settings if the address is not acquired automatically by DHCP If the address is acquired automatically by DHCP the data acquired is shown here IMPORTANT E Specify different IP addresses to CPU IO module 0 and CPU IO module 1 BM If you change the IP address the current connection will be disconnected when the BMC settings are completed by clicking OK Close the window once and then log on again by entering the newly set IP address or host name in the browser B The logon page remaining on the browser is the page you accessed by using the old address You cannot use it to log on B When you configure default gateway the gateway the server the management PC should be in a state where communication over network is available E If you make the settings in a state where communication is not available you need to switch on off the AC of the server in a state where the gateway the server and the management PC can be communicated over the network 4 66 System Configuration DNS Q Get DNS Server IP Address by DHCP DNS Setting DNS Server Address 192 168 2 240 1 Lets you select whether or not to aut
119. PS m If the status is Empty Absent the module is not mounted Sensor monitoring is not conducted m If disks are mounted on PCI modules IO modules the status of both modules is Simplex while the disks are mirrored Temperature or voltage error occurring during disk mirroring will result in the system to shut down CPU Information In CPU Information of Data Viewer s system tree the external clock is listed as Unknown When ft Tree Appears on Date Viewer in an Incorrect Manner If you open a Data Viewer immediately after the system starts up the tree or the state of a Data Viewer may not be displayed correctly due to high load of the system In about 20 minutes after the system startup when a pop up message below which prompts you to reconstruct a Data Viewer appears click OK The Data Viewer will be reconstructed and the tree and the status will be displayed correctly If the ft tree is not displayed delete the icon and register the server again by using the NEC ESMPRO Manager Floppy Disk Drive Information If you add or delete floppy disk drive connected with USB while the system 1s running the drive information under the I O Device in the data viewer will be updated at the next system startup 5 22 Installing and Using Utilities When the Displayed BIOS Information is Incorrect Additional information of BIOS which is displayed by clicking ft CPU Module a CPU module General
120. PSSA ee Disconnect all AC power cords from both system and external peripherals prior to installing removing options A Rear 1 4 Precautions for Use CPU IO modules The following shows the place on CPU IO modules where the label is attached M E A CAUTION R FRUATY 3 YRBORROR BII P AHT FABRL ELCSSESUCFEU RoK MEPAKORBCSVET Refer to the User s Guide when option board or peripherals are installed Incorrect installations may result in damage to the system and lead to accidents I M iV A i CAUTION AA MRICSSIVR AY EPBVET TH20 008A D SMNSKDIZL CK RE SEED TEN FU CRML TUSRAVHVST RESETS RAILBLO IYA FORVROGHBESMAC REL As some components may become very hot during system operation give ample time to allow cooling as wel as usa precaution when handling internal components immediately alter powering down Some internal components may still be operational on battery power Refer to instruction manuals for this system as well as options prior to maintenance PHA WER PZ a ete Precautions for Use 1 5 PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY This section provides precautions for using the server safely Read this section careful
121. Power ON To power on NEC Express5800 ft series press the POWER switch located on the right of the front panel Follow the steps below to turn on the power 1 Power on the display unit and other peripheral devices connected to the server CHECK If the power cord is connected to a power controller like a UPS make sure that it is powered on 2 Press the power switch located on the right of the front panel The POWER LED illuminates in green After a while the NEC logo will appear on the screen d POWER LED IMPORTANT m When you connect a power cord to an AC inlet wait ten or more seconds to press the POWER switch m Do notturn off the power before you see the NEC logo and a character below the logo It may take one to five minutes for the logo to appear depending on you server configuration POWER Switch While the NEC logo is displayed on the screen NEC Express5800 ft series is performing a power on self test POST to check itself For details see POST Check described later in this chapter Upon the completion of POST the OS will start CHECK If the server finds errors during POST it will interrupt POST and display the error message See Chapter 7 General Description 2 31 Power OFF Follow the steps below to turn off the power If NEC Express5800 ft series is plugged to a UPS see manuals included with the UPS or the application that controls the UPS 1 Perform a n
122. QUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES m When you dispose of the main unit hard disk drives floppy disks CD ROMs optional boards etc you need to observe your local disposal rules Dispose the attached power cable along with the equipment to avoid being used with other equipment For details ask your municipal office IMPORTANT For disposal or replacement of batteries on the motherboard consult with your sales agent If data remains on the hard disk backup data cartridges floppy disks or other writable media such as CD R and CD RW it could be restored and reused by outsiders The customer is responsible for wiping out such data before disposal You need to exercise sufficient care to protect privacy and confidential information Some of the system components have limited lifetime e g cooling fans built in batteries built in CD ROM drive floppy disk drive and mouse For stable operation it is recommended to replace them regularly For lifetime of individual components and replacing procedures ask your sales agent A Do not detach a lithium battery yourself This equipment has a lithium battery Do not detach it yourself If the battery is exposed to fire or water it could explode RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS When the lithium battery is running down and the equipment does not work correctly contact your sales agent instead
123. RA 12 d IMPORTANT AZT Le ft Jie Peart PRS m Do not use a toothpick plastic pin or other breakable a A gl La objects m Ifyou cannot eject the CD ROM by following the steps above contact your sales agent 3 Hold the tray and pull it out 4 Take out the CD ROM 5 Push the tray back 2 38 General Description Handling CD ROMs Observe the following when you use a CD ROM on NEC Express5800 ft series As for a disk such as a noncompliant copy protected CD we shall not guarantee that you can use a CD player to play it with this server Be careful not to drop the CD ROM Do not bend or place anything on the CD ROM Do not attach labels on the CD ROM Do not touch the signal side blank side Place the CD ROM gently on the tray with the printed side up Do not scratch or use a pencil or ballpoint pen to write on the CD ROM Keep away from cigarette smoke Do not leave the CD ROM in a place that is subject to direct sunlight or high temperatures e g due to a heater If the CD ROM gets dirty with dust or fingerprints wipe it gently from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth When you clean the CD ROM use a CD cleaner Do not use a record cleaner spray benzine or thinner Store the CD ROM in a protective case when not in use Chapter 3 Linux Setup and Operation This chapter describes setup procedures to make NEC Express5800 ft series ready for use 3 2 Linux Setup and Oper
124. Remove the jumper pins 1 2 of the CPU IO module 0 and install them on the jumper pins 7 8 By referring to Installing CPU IO Module on page 8 19 install the CPU IO module 0 on the server Reconnect the power cord of the CPU IO module 0 and press the POWER switch to power on After the startup press the F2 key during POST to start BIOS SETUP Make settings in SETUP as you desire and then the settings by selecting Exit Exit Saving Changes Switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the outlet Clear CMOS for the CPU IO module 1 by following the steps 3 to 12 By referring to Installing CPU IO Module on page 8 19 install both CPU IO modules on the server Connect both power cords System Configuration 4 41 HOW TO CLEAR PASSWORDS 1 Power off NEC Express5800 ft series and unplug the both power cords 2 Remove the both CPU IO modules 1 and 2 from the NEC Express5800 ft series see Removing CPU IO Module on page 8 17 3 Make setting of jumper switch for clearing the password of CPU IO module 0 Remove the clips from the jumper pins 11 12 on CPU IO module 0 and place them on the jumper pins 3 4 on the CPU IO Module 1 4 Mount the CPU IO Module 0 to NEC Express5800 ft series see Installing CPU IO Module on page 8 19 5 Connect the power cord of CPU IO module 0 only and then press the POWER switch to power on 6 When you see 8151 Password Cleare
125. Replace the CPU IO module failed 902C BMCFW major revision BMCFW revision does not Update SDR PIA If updating it mismatched match does not help replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option 902D IPMB 1 SROM failure detected IPMB 1 SROM is faulty 902bE IPMBZ2 SROM failure detected IPMBZ2 SROM is faulty If restarting does not help replace the CPU IO module ft Remote Management Card option or center plane 902F PCI Device Test failed PCI Device is faulty Replace the CPU IO module 9060 Module 0 is not present CPU IO module 0 is not mounted Mount the primary unit If restarting does not help replace the CPU IO module 9061 Module is not present CPU IO module 1 is not mounted Mount the primary unit If restarting does not help replace the CPU IO module Troubleshooting 7 9 On screen error message Cause Action 9039 Not keep last boot Unintended operations such Reconfigure the boot option by order as incorrect DC off are using the BIOS setup If performed reconfiguring the boot option does not help replace the CPU IO module 9070 The error occurred The sensor of water cooling Replace the water cooling kit If during water cooling kit is faulty turning on off AC does not help unit sensor reading replace CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card NOTICE System is force Abnormality of one or both View
126. Server Maintenance Utility is a tool for managing server operation It is used to configure operation patterns to check status at replacement of parts and to instruct operations How to start NEC ESMPRO Agent Server Maintenance Utility that is installed on NEC Express5800 ft series server 1 Goto the installation destination of NEC ESMPRO Agent The default installation destination of NEC ESMPRO Agent is opt nec esmpro sa Here the destination is assumed to be opt nec esmpro sa 2 Goto the storage location of Server Maintenance Utility cd bin 3 Start the tool svmtnutl For using the Server Maintenance Utility in Japanese run the command below before starting it This command starts X Window and the screen will be displayed in the Japanese fonts init 5 If you star the Server Maintenance Utility without starting the X Window messages displayed on the console may affect the screen display If the screen is not displayed properly press Ctrl L to refresh the screen Screen Layout Tree view Information display view Component screen Displays information of the item that you selected in the tree in a new window System Information Installing and Using Utilities 5 41 Chassis Information contains the following information Item Description Type Chassis type of the server Part Number Parts number of the server chassis Serial Number Serial number of the server chassis System Informat
127. T may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding In such a case restart the server once again Do not perform any keyboard or mouse operation until the BIOS start up message appears when you restart the server O Does the server have appropriate memory boards or PCI card Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed Server reboots while running the SCSISelect utility O Have you modified the Setup settings From Server Monitoring Configuration Option ROM Scan Monitoring of Setup select Disabled If Option ROM Scan Monitoring is enabled the system may reboot while using the SCSISe ect utility Change back the setting after you finish using the utility Fail to access to internal or external devices O Are cables properly connected Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected Also make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order O Isthat device compliant with NEC Express5800 ft series Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed Troubleshooting 7 25 O Isthe power on order correct When the server has any external devices connected power on the external devices first then the server O Did you install drivers for connected optional devices Some optional devices require specific device drivers Refer to the manual that comes with the device to install its driver
128. TION poms CMS LIT RSL NS A AIDA EI PAOI BOBO ON mm A SURABAS NCSGUON ROCA 5G WERT ERRE GRE SEL NE Do not drop any screws inside the system Rear TEHE WARNING HEAVY ITEM mocUm m eam ORME WRIA WETA TFL AT WLR SMU Re RTH Solera 3 To avoid the risk of personal injury or damage to the unit move the unt with at least three or more Rack model K bc CBS toca ETM RAO OS M T IE Pe UL nit tho powering down alow Thur EST UE Firmy eid the fatto of the aystere When removing trom the rack cabinet Precautions for Use 1 3 CAUTION EIT A EU A A Be raro when sccasang me Pole of he system LITE feet MONS E HAYE MEREL MURTAS LIFT PSL A Fom ima in inland e mio Wen iud to Mand TBENSUBRKH NIDKOSRER WARNING HEAVY ITEM 2 lt URS ERA On MECH IT Fe uos art coe ATBAMBVEBURNE Qualified service KERF Watt xo AGL L No user serviceable components Inside E34 AOC WEEE oTLSOTERLT RSLS Dek vt PEPI WERISL IME MERTEN SOABLT RAN miae AEE RS amo for Jb aott tho risk of porsonal Injury hando tho de tray andmodde win caro whan asringromcovng fram ho FIBARABABLE GUM HBCERTEU if EA EE Fe E ELA A Do not drop any screws inside the system 17j3V70BRNU BARRE 22 E eo HOO MENS LSRUCOS7 7VEXUCEEG xir mem v RARE TEELE TUE Ln JU
129. The quick dump service is started The server is operating normally It failed in the doubleness surveillance of a network card Failed to monitor duplexity of the network card It failed in the doubleness surveillance of a SCSI device Failed to monitor duplexity of the SCSI device If the error occurs frequently contact your sales agent It failed in the doubleness surveillance of a FC device Failed to monitor duplexity of the FC device If the error occurs frequently contact your sales agent The error occurred in session creation with client application Failed to create a session for communication with client applications Contact your sales agent Troubleshooting 7 21 Message Meaning Action It failed in the client attestation Client authentication was unsuccessful It failed in the initialization of a transaction Failed to initialize the transaction Transaction task abort The transaction is terminated because there was a communication error Invalid service demand An invalid service was requested It failed in the device I O control from client application The I O control requested by the client was unsuccessful It failed in the notification of doubling information for the HAS Driver Failed to report the duplexed status to the HAS driver It failed in IOCTL which notifies the removal completion
130. U processor DIMM memory PCI card you need to remove the CPU IO module IMPORTANT m Ask your sales agent to replace the CPU IO module and components of the CPU IO module m Make sure to read ANTI STATIC MEASURES and PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE before installing or removing options m To install or remove CPU or DIMM first power off the server before removing the CPU IO module m Removing the module being operating may cause unexpected trouble Use the management software e g Server Maintenance Utility or NEC ESMPRO Manager to identify the module to be removed so that the module is removed when it is stopped without fail Then remove the relevant module after verifying the Status LED on the CPU IO module See Chapter 2 LEDs for details of the Status LED m After installing CPU IO module always power on the module using the power switch Precautions When replacing a CPU IO module replace one module and wait until dual configuration is established to replace the other module If you replace the both modules simultaneously establishing dual CPU IO module configuration which can result in interruption of the whole system See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting System Upgrade 8 17 Removing CPU IO Module Follow the procedure below to remove the CPU IO module The 320Fa L model is used in the example quoted here However steps you should take are the same for other models 1 Stop the CPU IO module
131. Utility runs on NEC Express5800 series with NEC ESMPRO Agent installed and is used to display print and initialize logs and export them to a file If you attempt to collect ipmi dat immediately after starting the OS or disconnecting the system a message IPMI driver operation error is displayed Wait awhile and try collecting ipmi dat again Coexistence with the Oracle products The installation of the Oracle products may change Startup Type of SNMP Service into Manual If so change the setting back to Automatic and set up correctly according to the description of the Oracle product Connection with Hard Disk Drive The preventive hard disk drive maintenance function may not work properly when a hard disk drive which was used in a system where NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed is connected to other systems Make sure not to connect such hard disk drives Change Settings of File System Monitoring Function New settings in thresholds of monitoring interval and free space monitoring are not reflected immediately after they are changed They are reflected at the next monitoring interval of monitoring service CPU Load Ratio of SNMP Service snmpd While monitoring the server from NEC ESMPRO Manager the CPU load ratio of SNMP Service on the NEC ESMPRO Agent side may increase at every monitoring interval default 1 minute NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent exchange information through SNMP Service If the server status
132. accessed the LED blinks in green When this LED illuminates in amber it indicates a hard disk drive has a problem You can see the status of the failed hard disk drive by checking the LED of each hard disk drive If this LED is blinking in amber it indicates volumes in hard disk drives are not mirrored See HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT ON THE NEC Express5800 ft series page 3 2 to configure mirror volumes General Description 2 23 FT Status LED The LED stays green while the server is running normally in DUPLEX mode If this LED does not illuminate or illuminates blinks in amber there is something wrong with the server The table below shows indications of the FT Status LED and their meanings Aiea Description Action Green The device is running successfully in the Duplex mode Not on Power is off Performing POST Wait for a while it will illuminate in green and the mode will become Duplex shortly after POST The device is running in The LED indicates only one of modules is the Sipmlex mode running If this status is observed right after the System startup or activation of a module that has been stopped wait for a while The status will change to the Duplex mode with the LED lit in green If the LED does not illuminate in green after a few minutes a device LAN FC connected storage or internal disk that should be redundant may not be attached properly Check to see device
133. agement brings the decrease in costs and thus customer s benefit m What are NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent are server management software used to manage and monitor NEC Express5800 series systems on the network The installation of NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent enables the server configuration performance and fault information to be acquired managed and monitored realtime and also the occurrence of a fault to be detected immediately by the alert report function Installing and Using Utilities 5 9 m Effects of using NEC ESMPRO Manager and Agent NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent have sufficient effects on a variety of needs in versatile and complicated system environments Detection of server fault NEC ESMPRO Agent collects a variety of fault information on NEC Express5800 series systems to identify the states of the systems If a server detects a fault the server provides NEC ESMPRO Manager with the proper alert report Prevention of server fault NEC ESMPRO Agent includes the preventive maintenance function predicting the occurrence of a fault in advance as countermeasures for preventing faults from occurring It can previously detect the increase in the cabinet temperature and the empty capacity in a file system Management of server operation status NEC ESMPRO Agent can acquire the detailed hardware configuration and performance information on NE
134. ager Example Determine type and location of server workstation trouble Troubleshooting 7 3 ERROR MESSAGES If the NEC Express5800 ft series enters the abnormal state the error is posted by various means This section explains the types of error messages Error Messages by LED Indication The LEDs on the front and rear panels of the NEC Express5800 ft series and near the handles of hard disks inform the user of the various server statuses by the colors and the patterns of going on going off and flashing If trouble seems to have occurred check the LED indication For the LED indication and meanings see page 2 22 LEDs This User s Guide describes actions to be taken for watch error message However if replacement of modules is necessary contact your sales agent 7 4 Troubleshooting POST Error Messages Powering on the server automatically starts the self diagnostic program POST Power On Self Test When POST detects any error it displays an error message and its measure on the display unit Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors Message indicating a floppy disk drive error Phoenix BIOS 4 0 Release 6 0 XXXX CPU Pentium III XXX MHz 0640K System RAM Passed 0127M Extended RAM Passed WARNING 02B0 Diskette drive A error press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to SETUP TIPS For error messages on optional PCI boards refer to the manual provided with those
135. ailable HCS 2 Error LED Unavailable Access LED on the CD ROM Drive This LED illuminates when the installed CD ROM is being accessed Hard Disk Drive LED Each indication of the DISK LED on a hard disk drive bay has a different meaning Blinks in green the hard disk drive is being accessed Illuminates in amber the hard disk drive has failed Illuminates in green and amber in turn the hard disk drive reconfiguration rebuild is ongoing This does not indicate the hard disk drive has a problem When the rebuilding is completed the LED goes off If the rebuilding fails the LED illuminates in amber Blinks in amber the hard disk drive has a mirror volume for which redundancy is not achieved i e mirrored configuration is in the degenerated mode General Description 2 27 LAN Connector LED e LINK ACT LED The LINK ACT LED shows the status of a standard network port It is green if power is supplied to the main unit and hub and they are connected correctly LINK It blinks green while the network port sends or receives data ACT When the LED does not illuminate during LINK check the condition and connection of network cables If there is nothing wrong with the cables a defect is suspected in the network LAN controller In this case contact your sales agent e Speed LED This LED indicates the network interface of the communication mode used by a network port 1000BASE T and 100BASE TX are the supported L
136. ance service support etc Chapter 2 General Description This chapter describes what you should know about the product its component names functions operating procedures as well as handling of devices and other parts Chapter 3 Linux Setup and Operation This chapter describes setup and operation specific to the product when it is on Linux Chapter 4 System Configuration This chapter describes how to make settings of built in basic input output system It also describes factory shipped parameters Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities This chapter describes features and operating procedures of a standard utility NEC EXPRESSBUILDER It also describes procedures to install and operate various software programs contained in its CD ROM Chapter6 Maintenance This chapter describes maintenance procedures and use of maintenance tools If you need to move the product for maintenance purposes follow the steps provided in this chapter Chapter 7 Troubleshooting If the product does not work properly see this chapter before deciding that it is a breakdown Chapter 8 System Upgrade This chapter describes procedures to add options and precautions See also this chapter when you replace failed components Appendix A Specifications This appendix lists specifications of the product Appendix B I O Port Addresses This appendix lists factory assigned I O port addresses Additional symbols The following symbols are used throughout this User s Gui
137. and then Display or by right clicking the blank space of the desktop and selecting Video Property the change is not reflected to the system For setting the video mode see SETTING THE VIDEO MODE on page 3 10 DISK ACCESS LED is amber and blinking O Isthe mirror of the hard disk not removed Check Disk Management and reconfigure the mirror if the mirror is broken See HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT ON THE NEC Express5800 ft series in Chapter 3 Linux Setup and Operation Relevant Disk LED and DISK ACCESS LED illuminate amber during the process of automatic mirror reconfiguration During the process of reconfiguration DISK ACCESS occurs at the same time and amber and green appear to illuminate alternately Wait for a while 1f it is found out that the mirror is being reconfigured in Disk Management etc When one of the disks that configure the mirror is broken the other disk becomes Failed Redundancy In this case DISK LED also illuminates amber Replace the failed disk and reconfigure the mirror The setting screen for kudzu is displayed at each startup When the system is started from a module different from the previous startup the setting screen for kudzu is displayed However no operation is required The screen of X is not displayed after failover This phenomenon may occur when you start X by running startx on the text console For using X read the notes on page 3 11
138. assword setup is not available before Supervisor password setup m Do not set any password before installing the OS m If you forget your password contact you sales agent System Configuration 4 19 See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description User Password Clear Indicates User password setup status view only is Set Supervisor Clear Indicates User password setup status view only Password is Set Set User Enter Press Enter to display the user password entry Password screen With a user password accessing the SETUP menus is restricted This option is available only if the Supervisor Password is specified Set Supervisor Enter Press Enter to display the supervisor password Password entry screen This option is available only when you log into the SETUP utility with the supervisor password Password on Disabled Specify whether to request a password entry at boot Enabled boot up User password setup is required beforehand Switch Inhibit Disabled Enable or disable the POWER switch on the Enabled server If you select to enable the switch will be disabled Factory set IMPORTANT If you have logged in SETUP by using the Supervisor Password you can check and change all settings If you have logged in SETUP by using UserPassword you see the settings but cannot make changes on the settings except System Time System Date a
139. at OS startup The following message may be displayed on the screen or recorded in the log if a USB floppy disk drive is connected at OS startup However this will not impact operations in the description below represents an alphanumeric character Partition Check sdg lt 6 gt I O error dev Command sector 0 I O error dev Command sector 0 unable to read partition table APIC error is recorded in the syslog by the operations such as inserting removing disks A message APIC error may be recorded to the log or displayed on the screen when you perform operations such as inserting removing disks with the server powered on because the internal status managed by the OS and the actual status on the server side are different The operations are not affected info synchronization error is recorded while the CPU modules are being synchronized A message info synchronization error may be recorded in the log when the CPU modules are performing duplication because the internal status managed by the OS and the actual status on the server side are different The operations are not affected card reports no resources log is recorded when using the built in LAN board A message card reports no resources may be output to the log when the system cannot allocate the resource for the LAN driver due to high load ratio on the network access The operations are not affected LAN driv
140. at achieves continuous computing operations data storage mirror and continuous network connection It allows you to run Linux based applications NEC Express5800 ft series achieves continuous computing operations for the Linux server and server based applications with its redundant CPU processing and redundant memory It assures data redundancy through duplication of server data on an independent storage system These features eliminate server downtime that is usually caused by network disconnection or trouble with the I O controller Ethernet adapter or disk drive and support operation of the network and server applications continuously While being transparent to application software NEC Express5800 ft series achieves high fault tolerance NEC Express5800 ft series detects status changes errors and other events and notifies the user of these events If you use an alarm notification tool you can configure NEC Express5800 ft series to notify you when certain events occur NEC ESMPRO is installed on the system as a server management solution NEC ESMPRO a GUI based management tool allows you to monitor view and configure NEC Express5800 ft series This tool also supports both local and remote management of NEC Express5800 ft series 2 4 General Description NEC Express5800 ft series mainly provides the following advantages Highly fault tolerant processing and I O subsystems NEC Express5800 ft series use redundant hardware and so
141. ation HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT ON THE NEC Express5800 ft series In the NEC Express5800 ft series all built in disks need RAID configuration Configure RAID 1 using software for the NEC Express5800 ft series The hard disks on the same slot location of the PCI module configure RAID As shown in the following figure hard disk drives in Slot 0 and Slot 3 Slot 1 and Slot 4 Slot 2 and Slot 5 should be paired to configure RAID 020202020209 Ooo 92099900000999 020909080 A 292090909 oS 202020 ex a 895988888989888888898988338986898286898985 GS o gp PopaReBeEeEeReRaREReREREREREE x 1200090992890 eee 90009988000093 0000900090000000 oo0 6999096 0 090909090009 2020202020909 05030800000908 Poo 209 4 3000 oo 50 888888988685868686398 2626952838 0909090 80 go So8c8o5 9o o o 0008 8 8 8 8 Qocooooopoeocoooooeoe oo8c8o8o8o8o8oc8o8o8o 26089823080808032808 xm deii M SOOOCOOOL e LL E Slots to execute the mirroring process 1 aH AT 100 6 Slot 5 LET OR 4 E TEL sit 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 IMPORTANT When adding disks or reconfiguring RAID the status of each disk becomes resync or recovery Do not insert remove disks turn off the power or restart the system during this status Wait until the status of resync or recovery is finished You can check the status of RAID using f
142. atus may become different from LED status after the remote KVM console is used If this happens press the key s on the device in issue so that LED status and actual operation match Operating special keys Operation of special keys from the keyboard of the management PC is not reflected in the server Click the following special key icons for operation on the host server Alt raised E pressed the status change every time you click the icon cult raised E71 pressed the status change every time you click the icon IMPORTANT For example if you want to enter Ctrl Alt Del click the Ctrl and Alt icons and then press the Del key on the keyboard By doing so Ctrl Alt Del is sent to the server After the operation click the Ctrl and Alt icons to cancel the special key operation Win Windows key icon 4 58 System Configuration Virtual keyboard When you click the virtual keyboard icon 2 the virtual keyboard appears Vir teat Rept ar E DOOD DODD Dabo BEZ E23 RD dd FE HAR pe e wj efo rivivjr olr e hg 125 pom Jof soir od uj speso smn 2 ejvisiniw s l nn fi Loot a J te Jel fo ar Je ond You can select either 104 or 109 keyboard from the tab By clicking buttons corresponding to each key you can make entry to the host server Zoom in and zoom out of the view Click the R icon to zoom in the view Click the A icon to zoom out the view Click th
143. ay take several minutes to recognize changes of disk status or the disk may need to be rescanned During this process the status color may turn to abnormal but when the mirror is created successfully it will return normal LAN Monitoring Report The LAN monitoring function defines the line status depending on the number of transmission packets and the number of packet errors within a certain period Thus the LAN monitoring function may report a line fault or high line load only in a temporary high line impedance state If a normal state recovery is reported immediately temporal high line impedance may have occurred thus there Is not any problem LAN Monitoring Threshold Because hardware faults on the network are found in the driver level NEC ESMPRO Agent does not monitor line faults Community Authority Depending on your OS type or its version settings for community SNMP service s security function are not made or default settings of authority are different To enable the remote shutdown and threshold change functions via NEC ESMPRO Manager make settings of community and set its authority to READ CREATE or READ WRITE 5 20 Installing and Using Utilities Monitoring with NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver 4 22 or Earlier NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver 4 23 or later is required for monitoring the server If you are using an older version you must install NEC ESMPRO Manager using the CD ROM shipped with the server ESRAS Utility ESRAS
144. ber 15 2005 11 58 AM Generated Thursday December 15 2005 11 58 AM your time Detail Alert generation time Thursday December 15 2005 11 58 AM 08 00 Status of the SCSI Slot ID 41 1 has changed from Empty to Online Details of alert report TIPS The device ID for example 41 1 on the Details window of alert indicates the location of the removed hard disk drive The state color becomes Green because a hard disk drive constructing a mirror is mounted aig xl Be E yew Tous bp esti xia Biel af SI ve SERVER 81 EMER Had Dick SCStEndosure ID 41 Gere FUATSU fA scst seoa MAPS357NC g c 1 41 1 203 SCSI Sio 10 41 1 1 Reagan lock Court Urknown EB scsi secas General of SCSI Slot Installing and Using Utilities 5 39 The redundancy status becomes Normal because the hard disk drive constructing a mirror is mounted ole SERVER B1 DataViewer DI x Ele Edit view Tools Help we zi el sta eid Pa fe ir wi SERVER B1 ESMPRO SERVER B1 ft ff Modulesto Modules 4 SCSI Enclosure SCSI Enclosure ID 41 Mirror tatus Hard Disk Status m 1 Nomal 41 0 Duplex 41 3 Duplex Nomal 41 1 Online 41 4 Online 2 3 Nomal 41 2 Duplex 41 5 Duplex isl For Help press F1 Wi Normal warning Abnormal 7 Mirror 5 40 Installing and Using Utilities Server Maintenance Utility
145. bind PCI Express 0 It has broken down in the past FT LED Amber On The PCI Express 0 cannot be bound because it has failed in the past FT LED Amber On Not able to bind PCI Express 1 It has broken down in the past FT LED Amber On The PCI express 1 cannot be bound because it has failed in the past FT LED Amber On Not able to bind South Bridge It has broken down in the past FT LED Amber On The South Bridge cannot be bound because it has failed in the past FT LED Amber On Not able to bind Module It has broken down in the past FT LED Amber On The module cannot be bound because it has failed in the past There may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent FT LED Green On The system was duplex FT LED Green On The system was duplexed The server is operating normally FT LED Off The driver did not bind the CPU module FT LED Off The CPU module is not bound FT LED Off The driver did not bind the IO module FT LED Off The IO module is not bound FT LED Off The Network device is not duplex FT LED Off The network device is not duplexed FT LED Off The SCSI device is not duplex FT LED Off The SCSI device is not duplexed Take necessary actions referring to Troubleshooting in the User s Guide 7 20 Troubleshooting Message Meaning Action FT LED
146. ce the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option 0B99 BMC Fatal hardware error BMC FPGA is faulty If updating FPGA does not help replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option 0B9A BMC not responding BMC device is faulty Replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option OB9B Private I2C bus not responding I2C bus is faulty Replace the part related to failed I2C bus Troubleshooting 7 7 On screen error message Cause Action OB9C BMC internal exception OB9D BMC A D timeout error BMC device is faulty Replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option OB9E SDR repository corrupt SDR data is faulty If updating SDR does not help replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option OB9F SEL corrupt SEL repository within BMC is faulty Replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option OBAO SDR PIA mismatched SDR PIA must be updated SDR and PIA data do not match If updating SDR PIA does not help replace CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option OBBO SMBIOS SROM data read error e 2C bus is faulty e SROM is faulty e BMC is faulty OBB1 SMBIOS SROM data checksum bad Data within SROM is faulty If turning AC power off and on does not help replace the CPU IO module OBCO POST detected startup failu
147. cohol if stains remain 5 Put the mouse ball back into the mouse If the mouse or rollers are wet in steps 3 and 4 put It back after fully dried 6 Place the mouse ball cover and rotate it clockwise until it is locked Rollers 7 Connect the mouse to the server the USB hub of the keyboard Maintenance 6 5 Cleaning the Floppy Disk Drive A read write error may occur due to stains on the read write head of the floppy disk drive Use the cleaner dedicated for floppy disk drive to clean the read write head It is recommended to clean the head on regular basis Cleaning CD ROM A dusty CD ROM or dust accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD ROM regularly 1 2 Make sure that the server is powered on Press the Eject button on the front of the CD ROM drive The tray comes out Hold the CD ROM lightly and take it out from the tray IMPORTANT Do not touch the signal side of the CD ROM with your hand Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Do not wipe the lens of the CD ROM drive Doing so may damage the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive Gently push on the tray front to close the tray Wipe the signal side of the CD ROM with a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Wipe CD ROMs from the center to the outside Use only CD ROM cleaner if necessary Cleaning a CD ROM with record spray cleaner benze
148. d When the processor 2 is installed its CPU ID is displayed If it the processor is not installed Not Installed appears Processor 2 L2 Cache Displays the caches size of the L2 of the processor 2 Hyper Threading Technology Disabled Specify whether or not to enable Enabled Hyper Threading Technology Execute Disable Bit Disabled Specify whether or not to enable the Enabled Execute Disable Bit feature Cache Setting Continuous Change the MTRR setting of the Discrete processor If it takes time to display screen set Discrete Factory set 4 12 System Configuration Advanced Move the cursor onto Advanced to display the Advanced menu There is no configurable item on the Advanced menu screen below Display each sub menu and make settings on the sub menu screen Select an option with the gt mark and press Enter to display its submenu See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Your Setting Boot time Disabled Specify whether to display the Power On Diagnostic Screen Enabled Self Test POST screen at start up If Disabled is selected the NEC logo appears while POST is in progress To display POST check results press Esc and F2 If Console Redirection is set to Enabled this option is unconditionally set to Enabled Reset No If you select Yes the system configuration Config
149. d BMC command access failed Replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option OB8D Could not redirect the console BMC Busy Console cannot be redirected BMC is busy There is a possibility that the BMC was busy and could not respond Restart the server again OB8E Could not redirect the console BMC Error BMC is faulty Replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option OB8F Could not redirect the console BMC parameter Error Configuration is faulty Configure the console redirection by using BIOS setup 0B90 BMC Platform Information Area corrupted 0B91 BMC update firmware corrupted BMC device is faulty 0B92 Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted Data within SROM is faulty Replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option 0B93 BMC SDR Repository empty SDR data is faulty If updating SDR does not help replace the CPU IO module or ft Remote Management Card option 0B94 IPMB signal lines do not respond SMC is faulty Replace the CPU IO module or a center plane after determining where IPMB error has occurred based on OS information 0B95 BMC FRU device NVRAM within BMC is faulty failure 0B96 BMC SDR Repository SDR repository within BMC is failure faulty 0B97 BMC SEL device SEL repository within BMC is failure faulty 0B98 BMC RAM test error BMC RAM is faulty Repla
150. d environment conditions Temperature 10 to 35 C Humidity 20 to 80 Check the system clock once in a month It is recommended to operate the system clock using a time server NTP server if it is installed on the system which requires high level of time accuracy If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by though the system clock adjustment is performed contact your sales agent When you store the equipment keep it under storage environment conditions Temperature 10 to 55 C Humidity 20 to 80 non condensing If NEC Express5800 ft series the built in optional devices and the media set for the backup devices tape cartridges are moved from a cold place to a warm place in a short time condensation will occur and cause malfunctions and breakdown when these are used in such state In order to protect important stored data and assets make sure to wait for a sufficient period of time to use the server or components in the operating environment Reference Length of the time effective at avoiding condensation in winter more than 10 C differences between room temperature and atmospheric temperature Disk devices Approximately 2 3 hours Tape media Approximately 1 day Precautions for Use 1 13 m Make sure that the optional devices are attachable and connectable to the equipment There is a risk of malfunctions that could lead to a breakdown of the equipment even if you could attach and connect m Mak
151. d By Jumper and Press F1 to resume F2 to Setup during POST after the startup press the POWER switch to power off and then disconnect the power cord from the outlet Example Phoenix ServerBIOS 3 Release 6 0 Copyright 1985 2003 Phoenix Technologies Ltd All Rights Reserved GPJ1 HA XXXX X XXXXXXXXXX IGPJ BIOS Release X X Build Time XX XX KX XX XX XX 2x Intel R Xeon R CPU 3 60GHz 3072M System RAM Passed 2048K Cache SRAM Passed System BIOS shadowed Video BIOS shadowed IPMI Base Board Management Controller was detected Device ID XX Device Revision XX IPMI Version X X Firmware Revision XX XX Self Test Result XXXXH SMBIOS Initialize Passed System Monitoring Check Passed ERROR 8151 NVRAM Cleared By Jumper Press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to Setup 7 By referring to Removing CPU IO Module on page 8 17 remove the CPU IO module 0 from the server 8 Reset the jumper switch setting Remove the clips from the jumper pins 3 4 and place them on the jumper pins 11 12 on the CPU IO Module 0 9 Clear password for the CPU IO module 1 by following the steps 3 to 8 4 42 System Configuration 10 By referring to Installing CPU IO Module on page 8 19 install both CPU IO modules on the server 11 Connect both power cords System Configuration 4 43 BMC Configuration Jumper Settings You can restore the initial values of the BMC configuration in
152. d on this selected CPU PCI module Memory check starts A message appears at the upper left of the screen to show that the basic and expanded memories are being counted The memory check may take a few minutes to complete depending on the server s memory size Likewise it may take about one minute for the screen to appear when the server is rebooted Note that if you have replaced the PCI module the server will perform a reset of the MAC address then reboot itself before the memory check The server starts processor check IO check and initialization Several messages appear they show the ID of the selected CPU PCI modules information on the processor detection of the keyboard and mouse etc A message appears at the lower left of the screen prompting for startup of the BIOS setup utility SETUP Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP You will need to start it when you want to modify the configuration for using the server Unless this message appears together with an error message you do not need to start the utility to modify the configuration If you wait for a few seconds POST will go on automatically To start the SETUP utility press F2 while the above message is displayed For setting and parameter functions see the section of BIOS setup When SETUP is completed the server will reboot itself automatically and perform POST A message appears prompting for startup of SCSI BIOS setup utility When a built in SCSI cont
153. date files may be corrupted Obtain update file files again 11 Try again If the error persists contact your service Update has failed representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC 12 Could not switch to the update Try again If the error persists contact your service representative because a failure may have occurred in mode BMC 13 Could not find the update targets Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 14 invalidtaddr ss Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 15 Try again If the error persists contact your service Writing has failed representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC 16 Unsupported token is detected Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 17 Invalid segment information Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 18 Invalid data length Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 19 Failed to open the file The specified file may not exist Check the file name 20 Failed to close the file The specified file may be corrupted 21 inv lida fie checker Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 22 Failed to parse files Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 23 Failed to parse files Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 24 Failed to load files Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 25 Could not
154. dc5 5 hadd5 md3 resync3 9 2 hadc1 5 hadd1 mdi duplex 0 hada2 3 hadb2 md2 duplex 0 hada3 3 hadb3 mdo boot duplex 0 hada1 3 hadb1 TIPS B If you attempt to start ftdiskadm more than once at a time Cannot start is displayed If this message is displayed even when only one ftdiskadm is started it may have been terminated without clearing the information In such a case run ftdiskcleanup and then start ftdiskadm W The trace log of ftdiskadm is recorded to the var log ftdiskadm directory If the files occupies a large part of the disk space delete them from the oldest E Boot disks are inserted into the Slot0 and Slot3 normally If you can only boot the system in the simplex mode insert a boot disk into the Slot0 and boot the system M After the disk is expanded and the system is restarted the name of the disk device used by diskdump is changed Refer to DUMP INITIALIZATION and modify etc sysconfig diskdump System Upgrade 8 13 5 25 INCH DEVICE The server has two slots to which you can install magnetic tape backup devices You need a SCSI controller sold separately to install a backup device 0 0 000 o o 2 Pees ee 0000000000000090000000000000000000000000000000 8o8e8e8e8o8o8e8e8o8o8o8e8o8o8o8e8e8o8o8c3c8c52 bb8 amp o8o9o8e8e8o9o9c8e8o8o8o3e8e8ec8o9e ORO Oocccocoococcd 9505869595050 a9aesogon a I o 8 o wq 9 9 o 215
155. de in addition to the caution symbols described at the beginning IMPORTANT Important points or instructions to keep in mind when using the server or software CHECK Something you need to make sure when using the server of software TIPS Helpful information something useful to know Accessories This product is shipped with various accessories See the attached list to make sure everything is included and check the individual items If some component is missing or damaged contact your sales agent Keep the accessories in a safe place You will need them when you perform setup addition of options or replacement of failed components To check NEC EXPRESSBUILDER components see the attached list Be sure to fill out and mail the software registration card that is attached to your operating system Make backup copies of included floppy disks if any Keep the original disks as the master disks use these copies in operation Improper use of an included floppy disk or CD ROM may alter your system environment If you find something unclear stop using them and contact your sales agent CONTENTS PREPAC P ia eet AERA RR Hehe e RR Ue UE Seale sete ta en di i ABOUTTHIS USER S GUIDE 5 0 cates cevelasncasbecdsdovsedes de ees ii Chapter 1 Precautions fo
156. display the Exit menu Main Advanced Hecht Saving Changes 4 28 System Configuration The following describes each option on the Exit menu Exit Saving Changes Select this option to save the current configuration data into the CMOS non volatile memory and exit the SETUP utility Select Exit Saving Changes to display the right screen Select Yes to save the current a E a VIP configuration data into the CMOS ue ING non volatile memory and exit the SETUP utility The server will automatically restart the system Exit Discarding Changes Select this option to exit the SETUP utility without saving the current configuration data into the CMOS non volatile memory If you select Yes here the SETUP Warning dialogue box appears If you select No in the SETUP Warning dialogue box you can exit SETUP without saving the changes you have made If you select Yes in the dialogue box you can exit SETUP with the changes you have made saved in CMOS The server reboots automatically Discard changes and arit cup now m Load Setup Defaults Select this option if you want to reset all values in SETUP to default factory set values When you select Load Setup Defaults the dialogue box as shown on the right appears If you select Yes in the dialogue box default values are restored If you select No you will see the Exit menu screen IMPORTANT The default value sligh
157. dministrator Network WEB Server of Alert Mail Reads the BMC configuration file Saves the BMC configuration file Edits the BMC configuration Reloads the BMC configuration Sets the data loaded from the file to the BMC in a batch Lets you select what to be configured Shows the overall information on the current values TIPS When you load configuration from the file choose to make settings of the BMC in a batch System Configuration 4 63 User Settings Here you cam make user account settings When you click User on the left pane of the BMC configuration window total of 20 accounts appear in the right pane When you select the account you want to modify or add and click the icon for editing La ji the following window for editing a user account appears No 1 Username administrator Password KVM Privilege v Remote KVM Console Enable 1 Enter the user name 2 Enter the password 3 You can specify whether or not to enable the remote KVM console Select the check box if you want to enable it When you click OK all the information you have edited will be written into the BMC When you click Cancel the window closes without saving what you have edited 4 64 System Configuration Network Settings Here you can make network settings of BMC such as IP address configuration IMPORTANT W The following ports are used for the remote management
158. dministrator use only m The SETUP utility allows you to set a password The server is provided with two levels of password Supervisor and User With the Supervisor password you can view and change all system parameters of the SETUP utility With the User password system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited m Do not set any password before installing the OS m The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility Dialog boxes appearing on your SETUP utility thus may differ from descriptions in this User s Guide If you find anything unclear see the online help or ask your sales agent System Configuration 4 3 Starting SETUP Utility Powering on the server starts POST Power On Self Test and displays its check results If the NEC logo is displayed press Esc After a few seconds either of the following messages appears at bottom left on the screen depending on your system configuration Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP or Press lt F12 gt to boot from Network You may see either of the following messages at bottom left on the screen when POST terminates Press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to SETUP Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility the password entry screen appears Enter the password Enter password Up to three password entries will be accepted If you
159. does not help replace CPU IO module 9038 Check date and time settings Chipset Data and time settings are incorrect 9001 Missing date and time synchronization Information delivery among units failed If reconfiguring by using BIOS setup does not help replace the CPU IO module 9002 Memory not installed DIMM is not implemented DIMM is faulty Mount or replace the DIMM 9003 Memory implementation error detected Error is detected on memory implementation Check supported DIMMs and replace the DIMM If replacing the DIMM does not help replace the CPU IO module 9004 Real time clock error RTC is faulty Reconfigure RTC by using BIOS Chipset setup 9005 Remote BMC access BMC of remote unit is faulty Check again if the CPU IO failed module is mounted properly If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 9006 HW Memory Test failed Memory is faulty Replace the DIMM If replacing it does not help replace the CPU IO module 9009 Chipset NMI occurred BIOS NMI handler is executed and POST is stopped Obtain detailed information and replace the CPU IO module 900A PEXA Link Width PCI EX Link is faulty Since performance becomes Warning slightly lower replace the CPU IO 900B PEXB Link Width module in case of an emergency Warning 900D PEXD Link Width Warning 900E PEXE Link Width Warning 9021 Trace memory test Trace memory is faulty
160. ds may be damaged m Since the sensor information specific to the server is not written to the added ft Remote Management Card the messages below are displayed and the startup process temporally stops when starting the server POST The server may be in such a state when the NEC logo screen is displayed and the startup process is stopped Press ESC to delete the logo screen and check the diagnostic message H W Configuration of BMC is corrupted Update BMC H W Configuration by configuration tool Refer to BMC configuration manual When the messages above are displayed press F1or POST starts if you wait for a while NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts by inserting the EXPRESSBUIDER CD ROM that comes with the server into the CD ROM drive Select the Tools menu Initialize Remote Management Card from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER main menu and write the sensor information specific to the server Running the initialize Remote Management Card resets the AC LINK setting Server AC LINK of the BIOS setup to the initial value Last State If you have changed the value you will need to set it again m The ft Remote Management Card is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the PCI board Do not touch the board terminals or its parts with a bare hand or place the board directly on the desk For more information on static electricity
161. e icon to display the screen in the same size as the device Click the window resize icon tH to adjust the remote KVM console window size to the remote screen size Refreshing the screen Click the screen refresh icon Le to refresh the remote KVM console screen If the screen is distorted refresh the screen Modifying properties When you click the KVM properties icon EL the KVM properties window appears in which you can specify an interval between screen refreshes IMPORTANT A shorter interval will reduce garbage remaining on the screen However note that a shorter interval can slow down the terminal response speed or impact network traffic System Configuration 4 59 IPMI information System event logs SEL sensor data record SDR or field replacement unit FRU can be displayed Such information is referred to as the IPMI information The information can be used to examine errors and events on the server and identify which part should be replaced System Event Log SEL Network Status 1192 168 11 IL administrator a 9 Host information 3 When you click the icon to start up system event logs Ea on the control panel SEL information is collected from the BMC and shown on the system event log SEL window as shown below LED DC ON Ready Power Control Window HAStatus xi mjejoj9 amp Module 0 EN 3E CL
162. e 15 625 MicroSecond Error Correction ECC ECC Information Threshold Exceeded Within the limits of threshold EfConectable Errors 0 Eintermittent Errors 0 E Uncorrectable Errors 0 jm DIMM ID 0 2 im DIMM ID 0 3 fp DIMM ID 0 4 fm DIMM D 0 5 CPU Module ID 2 PCI Module SCSI Enclosure Mirror Disk Manufacture Information JEDEC ID Unknown Location Code 255 Part Number Unknown Manufactured Date Specific Data Status M Online Wi Normal Warning Mill Abnormal 7 For Help press F1 Remove the CPU IO module referring to page 8 17 Replace the DIMM Install the CPU IO module referring to page 8 19 Start up the CPU IO module using NEC ESMPRO Manager or Server Maintenance Utility c BON System Upgrade 8 25 PROCESSOR CPU In addition to the standard CPU Intel Xeon Processor you can add one CPU to make a multi processor system IMPORTANT m The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the CPU Do not touch the CPU terminals or onboard parts with a bare hand or place the CPU directly on the desk For more information on static electricity see ANTI STATIC MEASURES m Do not use the system before checking to see it works correctly m Make sure to use the CPU specified by NEC Installing a third party CPU may cau
163. e Introduction in the attachment To prevent voltage sag This product may be affected by voltage sag caused due to lightning To prevent voltage sag you are recommended to use an AC uninterruptible power supply UPS unit Notes 1 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of NEC Corporation 2 The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice 3 The contents of this manual shall not be copied or altered without prior written permission of NEC Corporation 4 Allefforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual If you find any part unclear incorrect or omitted in this manual contact the sales agent where you purchased this product 5 NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product nor any liability for incidental or consequential damage arising from the use of this manual regardless of 4 above PREFACE Welcome to the NEC Express5800 ft series NEC Express5800 ft series is a fault tolerant ft server focusing on high reliability in terms of fault tolerance in addition to high performance scalability and general versatility provided by NEC Express5800 series In the event of trouble its dual configuration will allow the system to instantaneously isolate the failed parts to assure non stop running operation will be moved smoothly from one module to the other minimizing damage to
164. e fan unit has a problem the LED illuminates in amber see page 2 27 USB connectors From left to right USB2 and USB3 The connectors are used for connecting devices supporting the USBI 1 interface Monitor connector This connector is used to connect a display device Management LAN port This is a LAN port dedicated to management and can be used when a ft remote management card is installed The port is used when the remote management function or NEC DianaScope is used optional for 320Fa L 320Fa LR models LAN connector 1 This connector is used to connect to a network LAN connector 2 This connector is used to connect to a network LINK ACT LEDs A LINK ACT LED indicates the LAN access status see page 2 27 Speed LEDs A speed LED indicates the transfer speed of the LAN see page 2 27 PCI X slot 1 64 bit 1OOMHz 3 3V PCI X A PCI board of low profile type is attached to this slot PCI X slot 2 64 bit 100MHz 3 3V PCI X A PCI board of low profile type is attached to this slot General Description 2 17 16 SCSI connector This connector is used to connect the internal backup device optional and N8803 032 SCSI board only for tower model 2 18 General Description CPU IO Module 1 Module handle 2 Cooling fan unit 1 3 Heat sink CPU 1 4 PCI slot 5 DIMM For more information on slot 8 92 0 SS NS SSS ON S jS 905 S NSSRSRSSQSRSN SENS numbers see the f
165. e 1s being played In such a case retry the operation with the floppy disk inside the floppy disk drive General Description 2 35 To remove a floppy disk from the drive press the eject button CHECK Before removing a floppy disk make sure that the floppy disk access LED is off If you eject a floppy disk while the LED is on the stored data could be damaged Use of Floppy Disk You may need to store important data on floppy disks Since the floppy disk is a very delicate medium you must handle it with extra care Push the floppy disk gently into place Attach the label on a proper position Do not use a pencil or ballpoint pen to write on the floppy disk Do not open the protective shutter Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place Do not place anything on the floppy disk Do not leave the floppy disk in a place that is subject to direct sunlight or high temperatures e g near a heater Keep away from cigarette smoke Do not leave the floppy disk near water or chemicals Keep away from magnetic objects Do not clip disks Be careful not to drop Store floppy disks in a protective case where they are kept away from magnetic waves or dust To prevent data from being erased accidentally the floppy disk has a write protect notch When the disk is Pd write protected you can read data but you cannot write MOM M the data or format the disk It is recommendable to D gt 3 write protect fl
166. e cap to the connector Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock During Operation 4 CAUTION o gt P BP Do not pull out a device during operation Do not pull out or remove a device while it works There is a risk of malfunction and injuries Do not touch the equipment when it thunders Unplug the equipment when it threatens to thunder If it starts to thunder before you unplug the equipment do not touch the equipment and cables There is a risk of a fire or electric shock Keep animals away Animal s waste or hair may get inside the equipment to cause a fire or electric shock Do not place any object on top of the server The object may fall off to cause injuries damage to hardware and or a fire Do not leave the CD tray ejected Dust may get in the equipment to cause malfunction The ejected tray may also become a cause of injuries Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the equipment Turn off your cellular phone or pager when you use the equipment Their radio waves may cause the equipment to malfunction Precautions for Use 1 11 Rack mount Model CAUTION gt OOD o o Do not install the equipment on a nonconforming rack Install the equipment on a 19 inch rack conforming to the EIA standard Do not use the equipment without a rack or install it on a nonconforming rack The equipment may not function properly and ther
167. e information SDR window as shown below Voltage Processor 2 WCCP Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr Voltage Baseboard 3 3 V Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr Voltage Baseboard 3 3VSB jBasbrd Mgmt CtIr Voltage Baseboard 5v Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr Voltage Baseboard 5VSB Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr Voltage Baseboard 12V Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr Voltage Baseboard VBAT Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr 1h Sensor Type Voltage Processor 1 V CCP Entity Processor1 Owner Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr Upper non recoverable Threshold Upper critical Threshold 1 64Volts Hysteresis 1 63Volts Upper non critical Threshold 1 56Volts Hysteresis 1 55Volts Lower non critical Threshold 1 15Volts Hysteresis 1 16Volts Lower critical Threshold 1 06 olts Hysteresis 1 07 Volts Lower non recoverable Threshold 3B200010 03017FE9 020185 32 00040000 EB420701 0084 07 82 00 BF BO 00 49580202 000000D0 65 73 73 6F 72203120 56 43 4350 The upper pane shows a list while the lower pane shows details of the entry selected in the list TIPS SDR information is definition data on device sensors The BMC monitors sensors according to this information System Configuration 4 61 Field Replaceable Unit FRU Network Status Host formation LED Power Control Window HA Status xi 192 168 1 1 eoco aao T Montero administrator Gl 9 Ready Ey gil Primary When you click t
168. e is a risk of damage to physical assets or injuries For suitable racks contact your sales agent Do not attempt to install the server yourself To avoid a risk of injuries users should not attempt to install the equipment into a rack Installation should be performed by trained maintenance personnel lt For Maintenance Personnel Only gt Do not install the equipment in such a manner that its weight is imposed on a single place To distribute the weight attach stabilizers or install two or more racks It may fall down to cause injuries Do not assemble parts alone It takes at least two people to mount doors and trays to a rack You may drop some parts to cause a breakage or injuries Do not pull a device out of the rack if it is unstable Before pulling out a device make sure that the rack is fixed by stabilizers or quake resistant engineering Do not leave two or more devices pulled out from the rack If you pull out two or more devices the rack may fall down You can only pull out one device at a time Do not install excessive wiring To prevent burns fires and damage to the equipment make sure that the rated load of the power branch circuit is not exceeded For more information on installation and wiring of power related facilities contact your electrician or local power company 1 12 Precautions for Use For Proper Operation Observe the following instructions for successful operation of the
169. e sure that your options are compatible with the system If you attach any incompatible option there is a risk of malfunction that could lead to a breakdown m It is recommended to use NEC s genuine option products Some competitors products are compatible with this server However servicing for trouble or damage resulting from such a product will be charged even within the warranty period 1 14 Precautions for Use RA SAFETY INDICATIONS S Eum c
170. e trouble installing the card remove the card once and install it again Be careful since the card gets damaged if you press it too hard TIPS If PCI board 1s removed in the first step remount it referring to page 8 36 8 Install CPU IO module referring to page 8 19 9 Turn ON the power by pressing the POWER switch of installed CPU IO module Removing ft Remote Management Card Removal of PCI riser card follows the reverse procedure of the installation and remove the connector cap 8 34 System Upgrade PCI BOARD Up to three PCI boards can be installed to the CPU IO module IMPORTANT m The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the PCI board Do not touch the PCI board terminals or onboard parts by a bare hand or place the PCI board directly on the desk For more information on static electricity see ANTI STATIC MEASURES on page 8 3 m Make sure to read ANTI STATIC MEASURES and PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE before starting installing or removing options PCI 1 PCI 2 PCI 1 for 320Fa L PCI 2 for 320Fa L 320Fa LR 320Fa LR Note the following to install or replace PCI board m To make a dual PCI board configuration install the same type of board i e having the same specifications and performance to the same slot in another group When a PCI
171. ear the MTBF The driver successfully cleared MTBF The server is operating normally Troubleshooting 7 19 Message Meaning Action The driver started to set the MTBF threshold The driver started setting the MTBF threshold The driver finished successfully to set the MTBF threshold The driver successfully set the MTBF threshold The driver started to set the MTBF type The driver started setting the MTBF type The driver finished successfully to set the MTBF type The driver successfully set the MTBF type The server is operating normally Board bootup error log detected in the Module An error log at the module startup was detected There may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent FT LED Amber Blink It is dumping it FT LED Amber Blink Collecting dump The server is operating normally FT LED Amber On MTBF of the CPU module is below the threshold FT LED Amber On The MTBF of the CPU module is lower than the threshold FT LED Amber On MTBF of the IO module is below the threshold FT LED Amber On The MTBF of the IO module is lower than the threshold If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent FT LED Amber On Module broke down FT LED Amber On The module failed FT LED Amber On Not able to
172. ed Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk Ll Isthe media mounted Ifa failover occurs while the media is mounted the media is forcibly unmounted Therefore you need to mount it again When mounting CPU IO module and at a failover errors such as buffer I O error may be recorded but there is no problem on operation they are specifications of the server After the failover device name of the floppy disk drive may be changed Ex from scd0 to scd1 that phenomenon is due to the specifications of the server and does not affect the operation In such a case specify the changed device name for mounting the media Mount point is not automatically created If mount point is not automatically created the service needs to be restarted Run the following commands as root user to start the service etc init d messagebus restart etc init d haldaemon restart Troubleshooting 7 27 Fail to access to the CD ROM O Is the CD ROM properly set in the CD ROM drive tray The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD ROM Make sure that the CD ROM is placed properly in the holder O Is the CD ROM applicable to the server The CD ROM for Macintosh is not available for use O Is the media mounted Ifa failover occurs while the media is mounted the media is forcibly unmounted Therefore you need
173. ed for SCSI Slot Item Description Slot SCSI slot name Status Status of the SCSI slot The last digit of SCSI slots corresponds to the slot number of built in SCSI disk For the rack mount model 0 through 5 from bottom to top For tower model 0 through 5 from right to left SCSI Slot ID n m The following information is displayed for SCSI Slot Item Description Status Status of the SCSI slot individual built in SCSI disk The following information is displayed for SCSI Bus Item Description Path State State of the two SCSI buses connected to individual internal SCSI disks PCI Module PCI module number SCSI Adapter SCSI adapter number SCSI Bus SCSI bus number Installing and Using Utilities 5 47 Firmware Update The following information is displayed for Firmware Update Copy online BIOS image to offline Select this radio button to copy online BIOS image to offline Specify the file path to update Select this radio button to specify the file path to update Type the location of the firmware Type the full path location and the file name of the firmware to update in the edit box The following buttons are displayed for Firmware Update Item Description Execute Updates the firmware Do not perform the following operations during the update of firmware Start stop of a module OS shutdown Module removal Module power off
174. ed target is not present BMG If you do not find any problem contact your service representative Errors on the Remote KVM Console No Error message Action 1 Failed to disable Remote KVM Check the network environment and try again Contact your service representative if the error Console persists 2 Failed to enable Remote KVM Check the network environment and try again Contact your service representative if the error Console R persists 3 KVM packet transmission failed Check the network environment and server System Configuration 4 81 No Error message Action If you do not find any problem contact your service representative 4 The KVM request was aborted This is not a problem Click OK and close the message box 5 Check the network environment and server UDP packet transmission failed If you do not find any problem contact your service representative g Remote SM console can not Refer to page 4 63 and enable remote KVM console activate because it is disabled 7 Remote KVM Console is used by Try again after the client using Remote KVM Console other client finishes using 8 Failed to shut down Remote KVM Use Remote KVM Console after waiting 3 or more Console minutes 9 Check the network environment and try again Failed to make settings Contact your service representative if the error persists 10 Check the network environment and server
175. el I O Port Addresses Enabled Enabled Press lt Enter gt Press lt Enter gt Press lt Enter gt Disabled 2000h The following describes menus and parameters Read the descriptions to optimize your system SCSI Bus Interface Definitions Use arrow keys to select SCSI BUS Interface Definitions The following table provides information on options and their functions Option Parameter Function settings SCSI Controller ID 0 to 7 to 5 Set 7 SCSI Controller Parity Enabled Set Enabled Disabled SCSI Controller Termination Enabled This option allows you to select Disabled whether or not to enable the terminator Set Enabled Factory set System Configuration 4 33 Additional Options Use arrow keys to select Additional Options Boot Device Configurations When you select Boot Device Configurations and press the Enter key the display changes as shown below Master SCSI Controller AIC 7902 A at slot 00 02 03 00 Se ct SCSI peripheral from which to boot Boot SCSI Controller AIC 7902 A at slot 00 02 03 00 SCSI Device Configuration When you select SCSI Device Configuration and press the Enter key the display changes as shown below SCSI Device ID Sync Transfer Rate MB Sec Packetized Initiate Wide Negotiat Enable Disconnection Send Start Unit Command BIOS Multiple LUN Suppo Include in BIOS Scan SCSI Device ID Sync Transfer Rate MB Sec Packe
176. elp replace another CPU IO module or center plane 9086 The CPU IO modules were The GA driver may not support unsuccessful to share the server Confirm that the driver information is an appropriate one and restart the server If this does not help replace the CPU IO module or center plane 9026 The chip set revisions are The model of the CPU IO mismatched modules mounted to the CPU modules is different Replace the CPU IO modules with those of the same model 7 12 Troubleshooting Error Notification by BEEP An error message may not be displayed on the display unit even though the POST detected an error In such a case the beep sounds notifies you an error The error contents are indicated by the combination of beep sound patterns For example beep sounds once consecutively three times once and then once beep code 1 3 1 1 indicates DRAM refresh test error The following table lists the meaning of beep codes and measures against them Beep code Meaning Action 1 2 2 3 ROM checksum error Contact your sales agent to replace the CPU IO module motherboard 1 1 2 4 ROMEXEC code error Check the installation of DIMM board 1 3 1 1 DRAM refresh test error If the error persists contact your sales agent to replace the DIMM or CPU IO module motherboard 1 3 1 3 Keyboard controller error Disconnect the keyboard and connect it back on If the error p
177. en the power is supplied with the module POWER LED illuminating and both CPU module and IO module are stopped 5 66 Installing and Using Utilities m Collecting dump under system operation Either of the CPU modules is entered into the offline state and the dump 1s collected during system operation After the acquisition the CPU module is returned to the online state again This can be done only in the duplex system The table below shows the potential cases in which the dump is acquired Saving dump of stopped module Saving dump of component under Component system operation Remote Local Remote Local CPU Module When a fault or malfunction When a fault or When a fault or occurs in the system malfunction occurs malfunction occurs in Save the dump if requested in the system the system by maintenance personnel Save the dump if Save the dump if Executable in the following requested by requested by module state maintenance maintenance this can be viewed on personnel personnel Server Maintenance Utility Executable in the Executable in the screen following module following module e Removed state this can be state e Broken viewed on manager this can be viewed on Shot screen Server Maintenance e Firmware Update e Duplex Utility screen Complete e Duplex e Diagnostics Passed Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Not support
178. enance FRU 18 Displays the slot position information module 0 or module 1 19 Displays the slot status primary or secondary 20 Hides the control panel System Configuration 4 55 Remote KVM Console Remote KVM console functions of the BMC allow you to transfer a local console to the browser on the management PC over a network You can make full access to the server from the management PC using video keyboard and mouse CHECK B The remote KVM console supports the following five resolutions 1024 x 768 800 x 600 640 x 480 720 x 400 720 x 350 B Set the resolution of the device to one of these values If any value other than these values nothing will be shown on the remote KVM console B The mouse cannot be used on the remote KVM console on the operation window of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER TIPS KVM is an acronym for keyboard video and mouse The remote KVM control is different from those using a serial console remotely in that it allows you using graphics directly and remotely CHECK You cannot use the remote KVM remote control for connection via proxy When you use the remote KVM console logon with the settings where no proxy is used 4 56 System Configuration Starting up the remote KVM console window Click the startup icon e on the remote KVM console on the control panel to display the KVM console window Network Status Host information LED Power Controt HA Status xi w 19
179. enance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD ROM m From the floppy disk Set the Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and reboot the system The Off line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk The Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting Tools Create Support FD on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Features of Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility provides the following features m IPMI Information Viewer Provides the functions to view the system event log SEL sensor data record SDR and field replaceable unit FRU and to make a backup copy of them Using this feature you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part m BIOS Setup Viewer Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP utility to a text file 6 12 Maintenance m System Information Viewer Provides the functions to view information on the processor CPU and the BIOS and export it to a text file m System Information Management Provides the function to make a back up copy of your data Without the backup data the system specific information and or configuration may not be restored TIPS For information on making backup copy of system information see the separate volume User s Guide Setup Only the authorized personnel are allowed to restore the backup data
180. enance Utility screen e Broken e Removed e Shot e Broken e Firmware Update Complete e Shot To diagnose the module under operation bring down the module before the diagnostics e Firmware Update Complete Diagnostics Passed To diagnose the module under operation bring down the module before the diagnostics Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility IMPORTANT Diagnostics operations are performed to IO modules When IO modules are diagnosed CPU modules will be diagnosed as well CPU modules cannot be diagnosed individually The system diagnostics cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating firmware Wait until such processing is finished to perform the diagnostics 5 58 Installing and Using Utilities Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager Select the target module in the ft tree 2 Check the current state with the State display on the target module screen If CPU and IO modules of the target module are running stop them 3 Click the Diagnostics button in the Maintenance screen for the IO module of the target module When the diagnostics is started the CPU and IO modules are diagnosed together The diagnostics result can be confirmed by Result of the diagnostics on the target component screen The result of the diagnostics is reported by the server as an alert The result o
181. ent Do not let water or foreign objects e g pins or paper clips enter the equipment There is a risk of a fire electric shock and breakdown When such things accidentally enter the equipment immediately turn off the power and unplug the cord Contact your sales agent instead of trying to disassemble it yourself gt gt 1 6 Precautions for Use Use of Power Supply and Power Cord A OS Do not handle a power plug with a wet hand Do not plug unplug a power cord with a wet hand There is a risk of an electric shock Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe There is a risk of a gas explosion A CAUTION b gt e e ee Do not plug the attached cord in a nonconforming outlet Use a wall outlet with specified voltage and power type There is a risk of a fire or current leakage Avoid installing the equipment where you may need an extension cord If the cord that does not meet the power specifications there is a risk of overheating that could lead to a fire Do not plug too many cords in a single outlet If the rated current is exceeded there is a risk of overheating that could lead to a fire Do not plug the cord insecurely Insert the plug firmly into an outlet There is a risk of heat or fire due to poor contact If dust settles on the slots and it absorbs moisture there is also a risk of heat or fire Do not use
182. ent to be used Contact your maintenance personnel if such a symptom as above occurs IMPORTANT A disabled component with the MTBF lower than the threshold can be forcibly enabled by clearing the MTBF However contact your maintenance personnel for the forced use of such a component To clear the MTBF information of a component with NEC ESMPRO Manager use the Maintenance tree of the component of the ft tree of the data viewer Open the tree of the component whose MTBF information is to be cleared and select the Maintenance tree To clear the MTBF information of a component with the Server Maintenance Utility use the component screens of the Server Maintenance Utility The table below shows the potential cases in which the MTBF information of a component is to be cleared Contact your maintenance personnel for clearing MTBF information Component MTBF clear Remote Local CPU Module To start the module forcibly after To start the module forcibly after replacing replacing a module or if MTBF became a module or if MTBF became lower than lower than the threshold due to the threshold due to malfunction and malfunction and disabled the module disabled the module IO Module Same as above Same as above Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility Installing and Using Utilities 5 55 Procedure in N
183. er usr sbin diskdumpctl u dev hada6 3 14 Linux Setup and Operation KEYBOARD SETTINGS FOR X WINDOW SYSTEM The keyboard for X Window System is set to Japanese by default Keyboard model jp106 Keyboard layout jp If you use a non Japanese keyboard follow the procedure below to change your keyboard settings 2 Open etc X11 xgem conf on an editor Section InputDevice Specify which keyboard LEDs can be user controlled eg with xset 1 Option Xleds p 237 To disable the XKEY BOARD extension uncomment XkbDisable Option XkbDisable To customize the XKB settings to suit your keyboard modify the lines below which are the defaults For example for a non U S keyboard you will probably want to use Option XkbModel pcl102 If you have a US Microsoft Natural keyboard you can use Option XkbModel microsoft it Then to change the language change the Layout setting For example a german layout can be obtained with Option XkbLayout de or Option XkbLayout de Option XkbVariant nodeadkeys If you d like to switch the positions of your capslock and control keys use Option XkbOptions ctrl swapcaps Or if you just want both to be control use Option XkbOptions ctrl nocaps Identifier Keyboard0 Driver kbd Option XkbModel jp106 Option XkbLayout jp EndSection Linux Setup and Operation 3 15 3 Cha
184. er or Windows Sa NT 4 0 or later The Master Control Menu NEC EXPORSSBUILDER starts automatically NEC Express5800 Series Master Control Menu TIPS The Master Control Menu may not start automatically depending on the system status NLL O In such case execute the following file on the CD ROM from the explorer etc Ce NEC MC 1ST EXE O setup From the Master Control Menu you can install various kinds of attached software that runs on Windows and view online documents TIPS Some online documents are provided in the PDF format To view these files you need to install Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader of Adobe Systems Incorporated in advance If either is not installed click Setup Acrobat Reader first to install Acrobat Reader For the Master Control Menu operations click each item displayed on the window or use the shortcut menu displayed by right clicking the screen IMPORTANT Make sure to exit online documents and tools started from the Master Control Menu or menu before removing the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive 5 8 Installing and Using Utilities NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager NEC Express5800 ft series system management applications NEC ESMPRO Manager is bundled to accessory CD ROM NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and NEC ESMPRO Agent is bundled to Linux for NEC Express5800 ft series Back Up CD ROM This manual describes the functions and features provided by NEC ESMPRO Manager and NE
185. er off system components such as hard disk are very hot Wait the server to cool down completely before adding removing some component Symbol indicating a prohibited Description of a danger action may not always be indicated SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER S GUIDE AND WARNING LABELS Attention Indicates a risk of an electric shock Indicates a risk of a personal injury due to heat Indicates a risk of catching your fingers Indicates a risk of a fire or smoke Indicates a general precaution or warning that is not defined herein Indicates a risk of losing eyesight due to laser beam Indicates a risk of an explosion gt PPPP PPS Indicates a risk of a personal injury Prohibited actions Indicates a general prohibition that is not defined herein Do no touch the indicated area There is a risk of an electric shock or fire Do not touch with wet hands There is a risk of an electric shock Keep from flame There is a risk of a fire Avoid using water or liquid nearby If it spills on the equipment there is a risk of an electric shock or fire OO DOOO Do not disassemble repair or modify the equipment There is a risk of an electric shock or fire Mandatory actions Indicates a general action to take that is not defined herein Make sure to follow the instructions e Unplug the server There is a risk of an electric shock or fi
186. er performs retry automatically thus the system continues communication without disconnecting the network connection Troubleshooting 7 33 I O error is recorded in the syslog by the cable disconnection during the access to the Fibre Channel disk When the Fibre Channel connected to the primary PCI module Cable is disconnected during the access to the Fibre Channel disk logs may be recorded which seem that SCSI disk dev sdd I O error represent numbers occurred on the devices which are not running because the internal status managed by the OS and the actual status on the server side are different The operations are not affected HASIPMI related logs are recorded in the log The following event logs may be recorded during the system operation These logs are recorded when the software that access to BMC could not receive response from BMC within a given period of time There is no problem to the system by this warning A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response Process Although Primary BMC is ready A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response Process Secondary BMC is still running SCSI related logs are recorded in the system event log SCSI driver records mounting and unmounting of a module in the system event log but these events do not affect the system However if they are recorded for over 5 minutes contact your sales agent T IL When mounting a module gt is different fo
187. ersists request your sales agent to replace the CPU IO module motherboard 1 3 3 1 Failed to detect memory Check the installation of DIMM board Or DIMM board type is If the error persists contact your sales agent to incorrect replace the DIMM or CPU module motherboard 1 3 3 2 Initial setting error of the POST Memory Manager 1 3 4 1 RAM address error 1 3 4 3 RAM low byte data error 1 4 1 1 RAM high byte data error 2 2 3 1 Illegal interrupt test error Contact your sales agent 2 1 2 3 Copyright check error 1 2 Failed to initialize the video Check the connection of the connector for the BIOS display if nothing is displayed on the display unit Failed to initialize the option If the error persists contact your sales agent to ROM replace the CPU IO module motherboard Failed to expand the option Check the PCI board installation if the option ROM ROM of the added PCI board is not displayed If the error persists contact your sales agent to replace the CPU IO module motherboard PCI module board or added PCI board with new one 1 5 1 1 FRB3 monitoring timeout Check the installation of CPU If the error persists contact your sales agent 1 5 2 2 CPU is not implemented Check the installation of CPU If the error persists contact your sales agent 1 5 2 3 CPU configuration error Check the installation of CPU If the error persists contact your sales agent 1 5 4 2 Power error Check the installation of power If the error 1 5 4 4 persists c
188. es server 1 Goto the installation destination of NEC ESMPRO Agent The default installation destination of NEC ESMPRO Agent is opt nec esmpro sa Here the destination is assumed to be opt nec esmpro sa 2 Goto the storage location of Server Maintenance Utility cd bin 3 Start the tool svmtnutl E For using the Server Maintenance Utility in Japanese run the command below before starting it This command starts X Window and the screen will be displayed in the Japanese fonts init 5 If you star the Server Maintenance Utility without starting the X Window messages displayed on the console may affect the screen display If the screen is not displayed properly press Ctrl L to refresh the screen The maintenance functions that can be executed from NEC ESMPRO include three types those common to all components those specific to particular components and general system settings The maintenance functions common to all components are operated in the same way basically the operation procedure and typical examples of screen images are described below The table below lists the maintenance functions common to all components Component Start Stop ad nois ic R L R L R L R L R L CPU module JN o N N LN N Ns 1 NLwN IO module NL NL N N GN GN CN IN I PCI slot 3 m Ethernet board E SCSI adapter E SCSI enclosure
189. ess 8 29 Repl cing CPU us RA RO I Rudi 8 30 ft Remote Mariagemerit Gard 3 aee Ue Re ER eh OE EE dea 8 31 Installing ft Remote Management Card nn 8 32 Removing ft Remote Management Card sess 8 33 PCDLBOXRD x Sa A Pn eh Rt te EID TAA e redegi 8 34 Installing PCL Board 8 ech idee TR e e a a Edd 8 36 Removing PCI Board eT BRUM ie tes 8 37 Replacing PCI Bo td n Ru RR ERA GR RE ds 8 38 Setup of Optional PCL Board ws sim 8 39 AppendbcA Specifications nre eL ede o nte ens A 1 Appendix B I O Port Addresse S nennen ennt nnen nnns B 1 viii This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 1 Precautions for Use This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of the server 1 2 Precautions for Use WARNING LABELS Warning labels are placed in certain parts of the system so that the user stays alert to possible risks Do not remove or damage these labels If some label is missing about to peel off or illegible contact your sales agent Server Chassis Tower model WARNIN iG UND o Risk of alectric shock do not opan Qualttied servico personal ony No usar sarviteabla componants inside Baal ta ice d e api Fiir ai AOR EER 727 Jv bv SRE ABR LARL COO 777 VERG RSL PPA MACS NICE UAR a TACFASRRREREMS Disconnect all AC power cords from both system and external peripherals prior to installing removing options A CAU
190. f diagnostics executed last is displayed in the Diagnostics Information column In addition if a fault is detected by the result of the diagnostics the state of the General Information tree of the component 1s changed CHECK When stopping IO module check that the status of Ethernet is Duplex on NEC ESMPRO Manager Do not stop the IO module especially when LAN is connected only to the IO module on that side Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager zii De t yw Louk bp 18 Mouton amp y zara ala s mim Nel o SERVER SI ESMPRO e Bes uu Moddeso Bl crean eam E covers Bring Upiring Down Press the Bring Up button to bring the PCI Podda co pros te bro Dove button ste to bring the PCI Module down Bring Dorn MITER information Type Use Threshold Faks 0 Time of last fa Unknown Press the Clear MTEF button to Clear the MTEF formation mmu Disgnosbcs Informabon Time of Inst run Unknown Rosi Tes imber Uronen yi0 Port a luere Boar ID 0 10 105 Pott Modest Wen J 9 B SCS Encore Press the Diagnostics button Regrets eg dogrose Ue PCI Modde ermas For Help press Fi Wi Need Wenno M eem Maintenance screen of IO module PCI Module Maintenance Installing and Using Utilities 5 59 Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility 1 Select a target component from the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility The screen of the target
191. fail to enter the password correctly for three consecutive times the server halts You can no longer proceed Power off the server TIPS The server is provided with two levels of password Supervisor and User With the Supervisor password you can view and change all system configurations With the User password the system configurations you can view or change are limited 4 4 System Configuration Description of On Screen Items and Key Usage Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility Key functions are also listed at the bottom of the screen Shows the current menu Options to be configured erm Online help window Denotes there are submenus ago Sned Parameters selected parameters are highlighted Explanation of keys Cursor 7 4 Selects an item on the screen The highlighted item is currently selected Cursor lt Selects the Main Advanced Security System Hardware Boot or Exit menu Changes the value parameter of the selected item to the previous value Changes the value parameter of the selected item to next value Enter Displays a submenu or chooses the selected parameter Esc Displays the previous screen F1 Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations The help screen for SETUP operations appears Press Esc to return to the previous screen F9 Shows the following Setup Confirmation Load default configuration now Yes
192. fdisk dev had Check that dump partitions exist as many as the disks in fdisk Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System dev hadal 1 25 200781 fd Linux raid autodetect dev hada2 26 5124 40957717 fd Linux raid autodetect dev hada3 5125 5379 2048287 fd Linux raid autodetect dev hada4 5380 8899 28274400 5 Extended dev hada5 5380 6654 10241406 fd Linux raid autodetect dev hada6 6655 7929 10241406 83 Linux Check the partition which 1s created for diskdump and the ID is 83 In this example hada6 is the dump partition Note If 1 1 and 1 2 do not exist reinstall the OS Create a dump partition in the phase of partition creation during installation 2 Initializing the diskdump partition 2 1 Edit etc sysconfig diskdump Open the file in vi etc sysconfig diskdump and then add DEVICE dev hada6 dev hadb6 and comment out other lines For had specify the value of the partition you checked in 1 2 Even when the disk is expanded this file needs to be edited Linux Setup and Operation 3 13 2 2 Restart the dump partition Run the following command to reboot the dump driver etc init d diskdump restart 3 Formatting the dump partition Run the following command to format the dump partition etc init d diskdump initialformat 4 Registering a device to diskdump or removing it 4 1 Register a dump driver usr sbin diskdumpctl dev hada6 4 2 Remove a dump driver Run the following command to reboot the dump driv
193. find files Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 26 Try again If the error persists contact your service Failed to verify representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC 27 Update will be stopped because Check clients A software program other than you are interruption has occurred using may have interrupted 28 Online update is now being used Try again as necessary after online update performed by other tool is completed 29 Failed to acquire the current The network may be busy Try again If the error ee persists contact your service representative because revision 2 a failure may have occurred in BMC 30 WE Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update Failed to acquire lines 3 files again System Configuration 4 85 No Error message Action 31 Invalid line length Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 32 Unexpected EOF is detected Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 33 Unexpected token is detected Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 34 It is not Platform Information PIA of this server PIA does not suit this server Obtain update files again 4 86 System Configuration This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities This section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM that comes with your server a
194. formation logon name password etc which are set when you use a remote management function The values are registered on a CPU IO module basis Because of this you need restore the values for your target CPU IO module How to restore initial values 1 Power off the server and then disconnect the power cords of both CPU IO modules from the outlet 2 Remove your target CPU IO module from the server by referring to Removing CPU IO Module on page 8 17 3 Make clear settings of the jumper for the BMC configuration of the CPU IO module Remove the CPU IO module jumper pins 5H 1 3 and set them to the jumper pins 5H 1 2 see page 4 38 4 Install the CPU IO module on the server by referring to Installing CPU IO Module on page 8 19 5 Connect the power cords of CPU IO modules and wait for 30 seconds Then disconnect the power cords of both CPU IO modules from outlet again 6 Remove your target CPU IO module from the server by referring to Removing CPU IO Module on page 8 19 7 Restore the original statue of the jumper for the BMC configuration of the CPU IO module Remove the CPU IO module jumper pins 5H 1 2 and set them to the jumper pins 5H 1 3 8 Install the CPU IO module on the server by referring to Installing CPU IO Module on page 8 19 IMPORTANT By this operation BMC settings required in NEC DianaScope or remote management functions for connection with the server will be cleared as well If you are using NEC
195. frequently there may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent Base address reading error NEC GeminiEngine HA System Controller I O Base address reading error NEC GeminiEngine HA System Controller 1 0 Base address reading error AMD8111 I O Base address reading error AMD8111 I O There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The Modules does power down The module is powered off The server is operating normally Synchronization of the CPU module stopped Synchronization of the CPU module is stopped If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent MC log was gathered MC log was collected CMC log was gathered CMC log was collected The server is operating normally It failed in the collection of the MC CMC log Failed to collect MC CMC log of the module If the message is recorded frequently contact your sales agent Memory check was completed successfully Memory check was completed successfully The server is operating normally Troubleshooting 7 17 Message Meaning Action Memory check failed Memory check failed If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent Memory copy was started Memory copy was started
196. ftware to assure server operation even if one module suffers trouble with its processor memory I O including trouble related to the I O controller disk drive or Ethernet adapter Continuous network connection NEC Express5800 ft series maintains continuous network connection by detecting any trouble with the network adapter connection etc If trouble occurs the standby network connection will take over all network traffic processing and thus securely maintain the network system connection of NEC Express5800 ft series without losing network traffic or client connection Support of multiple network connections Since NEC Express5800 ft series can support multiple Ethernet connections you can add network redundant control or network traffic control Industry standard hardware platform NEC Express5800 ft series uses IA Intel Architecture based system hardware No need to modify applications You can run Linux compliant applications on NEC Express5800 ft series Thus unlike other highly fault tolerant products special API or scripts are not necessary Automatic mirroring NEC Express5800 ft series automatically maintains data as the current data Automatic detection and notification of faults NEC Express5800 ft series detects and sorts out all events such as general status changes and faults and records these events to syslog Transparent migration NEC Express5800 ft series constantly monitors events If trouble occurs on NEC
197. functions If your network environment has any firewall you also need to have configuration for the firewall Module name Port Protocol Direction Module Port number name number Remote KVW Not UDP BMC 623 client determined Mail server 25 1 TCP BMC Not determined WEB client Not TCP lt BMC 80 2 determined WEB client Not TCP BMC 443 3 SSL determined 1 Can be modified by selecting BMC Settings Alert Mail E Mail Alert Settings SMTP SMTP Port Number 2 Can be modified by selecting BMC Settings WEB Server WEB Server Settings HTTP Port Number 3 Can be modified by selecting BMC Settings WEB Server WEB Server Settings SSL Port Number When you click Network on the left pane of the BMC configuration window the right pane shows the overall information of the network settings as shown below E BMC Configuration BMC Settings Hostname IP Address Mask MAC Address User B sapphire bmc 192 168 1 1 24 00 00 4c 9f 13 ca WEB Server of Alert Mail When you click the icon for editing pid the following window for editing appears The window for network settings has three tabs System Configuration 4 65 LAN Network Settings LAN DNS Hostname Interface No 1 N MAC Address 00 00 4c 9f 13 ca 8 pue Get IP Address by DHCP p IP Address Setting I
198. g When writing is completed the Status column displays the result for each target BMC firmware i 1 BMCFW bhx Jul 9 2004 2 55 33 PM Platform Information PIA A0101 hex Jul 9 2004 2 55 35 PM Sensor Data Record SDR Applet f af Lg do0006 bin Jul 9 2004 2 55 37 PM KYM firmware D Jul 9 2004 2 55 31 PM CHECK E To apply updates for targets other than applet reboot the server or power off and then on the server B When you rebooted or power on the server to apply an update for BMC software SDR or PIA the connection with BMC will be disconnected Because of this you need to log in again E To apply updates for applets log out once close all browsers and then logon again You do not need to reboot the server Troubleshooting Error Messages Fatal errors System Configuration 4 79 When using the remote management an error dialog box may appear on the management PC if some problem occurs Messages and actions for the errors are described below No Error message Action 1 Fatal error JavaVM quits Try logging in again If the same message continues to appear contact your service representative 2 A fatal software error has Try logging in again occurred If the same message continues to appear contact your service representative Logon error No Error message Action 1 Authentication error Check t
199. ger screen e Removed e Broken Shot e Diagnostics Passed To update the module under operation bring down the module before the update When BIOS must be updated to new one Executable in the following module state this can be viewed on Server Maintenance Utility screen e Removed e Broken e Shot e Diagnostics Passed Firmware Update Complete To update the module under operation bring down the module before the update Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility Installing and Using Utilities 5 61 Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager 1 Save the image data of the update firmware in an arbitrary directory of the server Write down the path to the directory in which the image data is saved Select the target component in the ft tree Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen If the component is operating stop the component Stop the CPU module and then stop the PCI module Click the Firmware Update button in the Update screen for the target component Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager di SERVER B1 DotoViewer PTE Be ER View Too He 18 Module tio ee Sim p vm zi ve ee SERVER 81 R Mocking TOPROM information Modeleme 2424432290 Description aE Fimeeare Press the Fere Update buttollto
200. gether 2 LEDs For more information see the description on the front view page 2 7 3 Key slot The slot you insert the security key to unlock the front door 4 Drive cover The cover to be detached when removing the backup device bay Tower model 1 Front bezel The cover to protect devices in the front this cover can be locked by the security key shipped together 2 LEDs For more information see the description on the front view page 2 11 3 Key slot The slot you insert the security key to unlock the front bezel Rack mount model General Description 2 7 Front View inside The following illustrations show components in the front of the tower model and the rack model DOG 8 7 o0 ooo C O E fF amp SP O Q amp 6 D F oy lt o o o o o o o 09090909090909090809009090909 o o o nVaPalalalalatalala Q 05959595959595959590909696999 0009999999999995999095969069 06060999950599959599969906999 o O90999999995999999959599999 f 9595959 20808 Uu 5226269 39094 o o o o o o O OO 0 0000 0 1 PT aaa5o 90909090909696909c96909090909090968r 09096909 53 1 04 090909090909695909690909090969090968 09090908653 b8o8o8o8o8o8o8o8e8o8o5e8c8o8o8o8o8o8ogo 1 So2o80Sd Gy vovosovovososorosososczozovozozovozozo 20 ozozo 96909090909090959090909090909099909090
201. gnaling side facing the tray 4 Asshownin the figure on the right place the CD ROM on the tray and press lightly on the center to lock PL JENS 2 HES Pe de ay De 5 Push the front side of the tray gently to the drive closed position IMPORTANT If you hear noise while running the CD ROM drive reset the CD ROM General Description 2 37 To remove the CD ROM press the CD tray eject button as you did in setting the CD ROM When the access LED illuminates in orange it indicates the CD ROM is being accessed Make sure the access LED is not S illuminating in orange before you press the CD tray eject button Les He be a te o gt J ire nid d Boe Press the locking part in the center of the tray and pick the CD ROM gently When you have removed the CD ROM push the tray to the drive closed position When you cannot eject a CD ROM When you cannot eject the CD ROM from the server even by pressing the eject button follow the steps below to eject it 1 Press the POWER switch to power off this server i e the POWER SLEEP LED is off 2 Use a metal pin of about 1 2 mm in diameter and 100 mm long alternatively you can use a fairly large paper clip after straightening Insert it gently into the manual release hole located at the low front side of the server until the tray is ejected f a smile WE Wz i fi Wil MI TA IU
202. gt Status Raid Name Partition Status Member mdi resync DELAYED 0 hada2 3 hadb2 md2 recovery55 8 0 hada3 3 hadb3 mdO boot duplex 0 hadal 3 hadb1 Linux Setup and Operation 3 9 lt lt lt Performrecovery toeachmddevice Afterawhile use the following command and check the status again gt gt gt service diskdmp initialformat diskdumpctl dev hadb6 lt lt lt For boot disks Slot0 and Slot3 initialize the diskdump partition and regisrer the disk devices again gt gt gt Command Action 1 New Disks Remove Half Disk Repair Disk Remove Full Disks Status Raid Status All Disks lt Return ONO BW N Command 5 Status Raid Name Partition Status Member mdi duplex 0 hada2 3 hadb2 md2 duplex 0 hada3 3 hadb3 mdO boot duplex 0 hadal 3 hadb1 If each md device s status is duplex disk duplication is completed gt gt gt TIPS M If you attempt to start ftdiskadm more than once at a time Cannot start is displayed If this message is displayed even when only one ftdiskadm is started it may have been terminated without clearing the information In such a case run ftdiskcleanup and then start ftdiskadm E The trace log of ftdiskadm is recorded to the var log ftdiskadm directory If the files occupy a large part of the disk space delete them from the oldest Wi Boot disks are inserted into the Slot0 and Slot3 normally If
203. handle The lock is unlocked and the CPU IO module is pulled out IMPORTANT Before you pull out a CPU IO module check the rear of the server to make sure cables for Handle connection with peripheral equipment or network are disconnected If any cables are connected keep a record of where the cables are connected and then disconnect all cables connected to the module you are to pull out 5 Hold the release levers of the CPU IO module and pull it off IMPORTANT W Do not hold part other than the handle to pull the module W Handle the CPU IO module carefully Do not drop the module or bump it against parts in the device when you remove it 6 Carefully place the CPU IO module on a flat and sturdy table Avoid the dusty or humid place This allows you to access the devices in the CPU IO module For more information on how to handle these devices see the associated sections System Upgrade 8 19 Installing CPU IO Module Follow the procedure below to install the CPU IO module The 320Fa L model is used in the example quoted here However steps you should take are the same for other models IMPORTANT Make sure to read ANTI STATIC MEASURES page 8 3 and PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE page 8 4 before starting installing or removing options 1 Firmly hold the CP IOU module with both hands and insert it into the rack Hold the CPU IO module in such a way that its back panel connect
204. he operator to provide setup Enables the setup without influence of installed OS Help Describes the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER We recommend you to read through the help before the setup Exit The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER termination screen appears Installing and Using Utilities 5 5 Setup This NEC Express5800 ft series setup method is used to perform automatic setup operations from the settings of internal parameters and states of hardware to the installation of Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition and various utilities Use the setup program if hard disks are used with a partition different from that at purchase or if OS is reinstalled This feature carries out the complicated setup IMPORTANT E To install LINUX on your server do not use Express Setup Any other methods cannot properly install Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition in the server B The Express Setup is assumed to be used when the server has not been set up Its execution erases the data in the hard disk Tools Menu The Tools Menu is used to start each of the several utilities stored in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM individually for manual setup by operator Use the Tools Menu to provide settings that the setup program cannot do automatically or detailed settings Also use the Tools Menu when system diagnosis is performed or a support disk is created The items in the Tools Menu are described below Tools Menu RAID Board None Off line
205. he excellent GUI provided by NEC ESMPRO Manager allows servers on a network to be managed collectively The management screen is designed in the Explorer format to indicate the components in a server hierarchically for effective server management NEC ESMPRO Manager manages servers by using the following three types of GUIs a Operation Window Fs Operation Window 2nd_Devolopment_Division comm Ee Edt Mew Isle Orom bop The operation window is used to create the Y selee xie 5l ripis vl TK Cormnity coment map of servers connected to network to manage them The map can be multi layered depending on the installation areas organizations and objects Installing and Using Utilities 5 15 m Data Viewer The data viewer indicates the server source configuration information in the Explorer format In addition it changes the status color of the failed server component This enables you to identify the failed portion cf x herder System 10 Device 9 Enclosure Software H Network aM Expansion Bus Device BIOS Local Polling File System TUNE 3051 FTServer CPU Module PCI Module SCSI Enclosure Mirror Disk Hardware System I O Device Enclosure Software GS NO 9 E Network Expansion Bus BIOS Local Polling File System Device For Help press F1 IME Normal Warning MM Abnormal 7 m Alert Viewer The Alert Viewer manages fault reports sent from servers together A fault
206. he following is an example of a RAID recovery procedure gt gt gt Command Action 1 Bring Down System Disk 2 Bring Up System Disk 3 Status System Disks 9 lt Return Command 2 Bring Up System Disk Which scsi SLOT 0 5 3 Command Action 1 Bring Down System Disk 2 Bring Up System Disk 3 Status System Disks 9 Return Command 3 lt lt lt Confirm that the disk is added to the system gt gt gt SCSI DISK STATUS SYSTEM Slot name use serial path 0 hada 2 V3W1N8RA0050B5CL0399 h1c0tOl10ACT h7cOtOl0HOT 1 zm 2 3 hadb 0 V3W1RK5A0050B5CK040D h2c0t310ACT h8c0t310HOT 4 t 3 8 Linux Setup and Operation 5 Command Action 1 Bring Down System Disk 2 Bring Up System Disk 3 Status System Disks 9 lt Return Command 9 Restoring RAID Command Action 1 gt RAID 2 gt SCSI 9 Quit Command 1 Command Action 1 New Disks Remove Half Disk Repair Disk Remove Full Disks Status Raid Status All Disks lt Return OU 5 C Command 3 Repair Disk Which scsi SLOT 0 5 3 Creating the partitions of dev hadb mdadm hot added dev hadb1 mdadm hot added dev hadb2 mdadm hot added dev hadb3 md0 is under repair Command Action 1 New Disks Remove Half Disk Repair Disk Remove Full Disks Status Raid Status All Disks lt Return ODO PB WD Command 5 lt lt lt Confirm that the duplication process is started gt gt
207. he icon to start up information on parts to be replaced for maintenance FRU E gt on the control panel FRU information is collected from the BMC and shown on the window for parts to be replaced for maintenance FRU as shown below FRU Owner Primary FRU Device Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr DIMM A2 SPD Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr DIMM B2 SPD Basbrd Mgmt Ctlr Board Information Mfg Date Time 1 2 04 5 49 00 AM Board Manufacturer NEC Board Product Name G7HBG Board Serial Number 00000000 Board Part Number 243 631466 Board Version 000 Product Information Manufacturer Name NEC Product Name Advanced Remote Management Card Product Part Model Number N8115 02 Product Version FR1 0 Product Serial Number 0000000000 Asset Tag 0000000000000000 The upper pane shows a list while the lower pane shows details of the entry selected in the list 4 62 System Configuration BMC Configuration You can configure the BMC settings Starting up the BMC Configuration window Network Status Host information E Power Controt A oem HA Status xi mau lon eeo Sm administrator fl Ready primary When you click the icon to start up the BMC configuration ey on Control Panel the BMC configuration window appears as shown below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 96956 ae E BMC Settings 4 gt a
208. he support disk for starting the system check program is created System Management Function FD The support disk for system management functions 1s created BIOS FW etc Update The program which is necessary for the update work is transferred to the floppy disk which the various update modules of BIOS FW were stored in After the reboot an update program is started automatically from the floppy disk and various BIOS FW s are updated IMPORTANT During the execution of the update program do not turn off the power of the system If the update is interrupted halfway the system will not be able to be started Initialize Remote Management Card Allows you to configure ft Remote Management Cards with correct parameters of the system where they are installed In order to use this menu modules must be mounted to both systems IMPORTANT This menu appears when optional ft Remote Management Cards are installed System Management functions Allow you to make settings of BMC Baseboard Management Controller to use its report functions and remote control from the management PC Help Indicates the descriptions on several features of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Return to the Top Menu Indicates the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu Installing and Using Utilities 5 7 Master Control Menu Load the attached NEC UESTRE EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive of the computer that runs Windows Windows 95 or lat
209. he user name and password and then enter them again Access privilege error No Error message Action 1 Unauthorized operation You have no privilege to perform the operation Try performing the operation with administrator s privileges Consult your administrator Network errors No Error message Action 1 Check the network environment and try again The HTTP communication failed Contact your service representative if the error persists 2 Check the network environment Could not resolve the IP address You cannot use Remote KVM Console for connections via proxy 3 Check the network environment Unable to reach the target host You cannot use Remote KVM Console for connections via proxy 4 Check the network environment and try again Failed to download applet Contact your service representative if the error persists 5 Check the network environment The RMCP session is closed If there is no network problem contact your service representative 6 Failed to establish the RMCP Check the network environment session If there is no network problem contact your service 4 80 System Configuration The HTTP communication failed No Error message Action representative 7 Check the network environment The RMCP transmission failed If there is no network problem contact your service representative 8 The spec
210. ified RMCP protocol Check the network environment If there is no network problem contact your service cannot be used P representative 9 BMC resources to establish a new Try again after a connection from other client is RMCP session are insufficient finished 10 The RMCP session time out Check the network environment and server If you do not find any problem contact your service occurred representative 11 Check the network environment and try again Contact your service representative if the error persists BMC related error No Error message Action 1 The network may be busy Try again If the error The IPMI request was aborted persists contact your service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC 2 Check the server A failure may have occurred in Received bad response from BMC BMC If you do not find any problem contact your service representative 3 BMC does not support IPMI 2 0 C ontact your service representative functions 4 Check the server A failure may have occurred in BMC Failed to rumthelPMIcommand If you do not find any problem contact your service representative 5 Check the network environment Failed to send the IPMI message If the network has no problem contact your service representative 6 Illegal IPMI message was Contact your service representative requested 7 Check the server A failure may have occurred in Specifi
211. igure on next ET QQ o SS Ss SS page Qo NSNNRSNNRSSSSNSSSS S OS OO DOO SOR CPU IO module without a water cooling kit 320Fa L 320FaLR model General Description 2 19 p 2 D3 D4 05 3620 1 O GO d CPU IO module board 1 DIMM slots 1 1 DIMM slotAl 1 2 DIMM slot B1 1 3 DIMM slot A2 1 4 DIMM slot B2 1 5 DIMM slot A3 1 6 DIMM slot B3 2 ftremote management card connector 3 LANI connector 4 LAN connector 5 Risercard connector 6 PCI board slot 6 1 PCI board slot unavailable 6 2 PCI board slot 1 6 3 PCI board slot 2 2 20 General Description 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LED board connector Fan connector Jumper switch for CMOS password clearing Lithium battery Processor 1 socket CPU 1 Processor 2 socket CPU 2 HCS A connector unavailable Fan connector unavailable HCS B connector unavailable Jumper switch for BMC configuration General Description 2 21 ft Remote Management Card cl 5 OL gf 7 Muun D 1 Edge connecting to a server This edge of the card connects to the connector for this card in this device IMPORTANT Attaching this card to a slot or device other than those specified may cause problems Do not attach this card to any non specified slot or device 2 Management LAN port This port supporting 100Mbps 10Mbps is used to connect to a network You cannot use this port to con
212. ion 0251 System CMOS checksum bad Default configuration used System CMOS configuration is changed e Reconfigure the system CMOS by using BIOS setup e Clear system CMOS using hardware jumper 0252 Password checksum bad Password cleared Password is cleared e Reconfigure by using BIOS setup e Clear system CMOS using hardware jumper 0260 System Timer error System Timer is faulty 0270 Real time clock error RTC is faulty 0271 Check date and time Date and time are incorrectly Reconfigure by using BIOS setup setting set 02D0 System cache error CPU cache is faulty If replacing the CPU does not Cache disabled help replace the CPU IO module 02D1 System Memory exceeds the CPU s CPU cache is faulty caching limit 0613 COM A configuration COM A configuration is faulty If restarting does not help after change resetting the setting to default by 0614 COM A config error device disable Device constructing COM A is faulty using BIOS setup replace the CPU IO module 0B28 Unsupported Processor detected on Processor 1 Unsupported CPU is mounted 0B29 Unsupported Processor detected on Processor 2 Unsupported CPU is mounted Check the supported CPU and replace it If this does not help replace the CPU IO module 0B60 DIMM group 1 has been disabled 0B61 DIMM group 2 has been disabled 0B62 DIMM group 3 has been disabled
213. ion contains the following information Item Description OS Ver Name of the OS installed on the server and version of the OS installed on the server Name Host name of the server Product Information contains the following information Item Description Manufacturer Manufacturer of the server Product Product name of the server Serial Number Serial number of the server Version Version number of the server LCD contains the following information Item Description Module 0 Virtual LCD information of the module 0 Module 1 Virtual LCD information of the module 1 5 42 Installing and Using Utilities System Configuration System Configuration contains the following information Quick dump that is harvested at the same time of system reboot Select the Enable radio button to obtain quick dump at a system crash When a quick dump cannot be produced a dump is produced by the standard dump function Automatic firmware update Select the Enable radio button to enable automatic firmware update When this item is enabled and when one module is started the firmware System BIOS of the other module started later will be automatically updated to the one that is already running if it is old Automatic module start Select the Enable radio button to enable the automatic module start When this item is enabled and when the server is running in the simplex mode with
214. isassembling replacing or recharging it yourself RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTION Disconnect the power plug before cleaning the server Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power plug from a power outlet before cleaning or installing removing internal optional devices Touching any internal device of the server with its power cord connected to a power source may cause an electric shock even if the server is off powered Disconnect the power plug from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with a dry cloth Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug which may cause a fire A CAUTION High temperature Immediately after powering off the system system components such as hard disk may be very hot Wait for the server to cool down completely before adding removing components Make sure to complete installation Firmly install all power cords interface cables and or boards An incompletely installed component may cause a contact failure resulting in fire and or smoke 1 10 Precautions for Use CAUTION gt gt Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap The unused power cord connectors are covered with the protective cap to prevent short circuits and electrical hazards When removing the power cord connector from the internal devices attach the protectiv
215. isks not in Duplex mode Unless you perform mirroring including reconfiguration after failed disks are replaced in correct order the mirror may not be re configured Check if the steps Were correct 7 26 Troubleshooting The keyboard or mouse fails to operate Is the cable properly connected Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the server O Are the keyboard and mouse are compliant with NEC Express5800 ft series Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed O Does the server have drivers installed Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse drivers are installed These drivers are installed along with the OS Some OS s allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings Refer to manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct Screen freezes keyboard and mouse do not work If the amount of memory is large it takes time to copy the memory in dual mode and the system stops working temporarily during the copying but it 1s not system trouble Fail to access read or write to the floppy disk O Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks O Isthe floppy disk write protected Place the write protect switch on the floppy disk to the Write enabled position O Isthe floppy disk formatt
216. ited Second Printing September 2006 Copyright 2006 NEC Corporation 7 1 Shiba 5 Chome Minato Ku Tokyo 108 8001 Japan All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan Keep this User s Guide handy for quick reference when necessary SAFETY INDICATIONS To use NEC Express5800 series safely follow the instructions in this User s Guide This guide explains components that pose a danger types of dangers and actions taken to prevent them such components are labeled warning This guide and warning labels use WARNING and CAUTION to indicate a danger depending on the degree These terms are defined as follows WARNING Indicates a dangerthat could lead to a death or serious injury A CAUTION Indicates a danger that could lead to a burn other injuries or damage to physical assets This guide uses the following three types of symbols to give indications and precautions against a danger They are defined as follows Indicates that there is a risk of danger Each image symbolizes a particular type of danger Attention Indicates what you must not do Each image symbolizes a particular type of prohibition Prohibited actions Indicates what you must do Each image symbolizes a particular type of action necessary to avoid a danger Mandatory actions 02 gt Example Symbol to draw attention Term indicating a degree of danger A CAUTION High temperature Immediately after the pow
217. ith a 19 2K hardware console to be connected 38 4K 57 6K 115 2K System Configuration 4 23 Option Parameter Description Flow Control None XON XOFF CTS RTS CTS RTS CD Select a flow control method Console Type PC ANSI VT 100 VT UTF8 Select a console type Displayed only when the BIOS Redirection Port menu is enabled Factory set 4 24 System Configuration Event Log Configuration Select Event log Configuration on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the following screen Clear Online Event Loge Pros Enter See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description Clear Online Event Logs Press Enter To clear event logs of the working module press the Enter key and select Yes Clear Offline Event Logs Press Enter To clear event logs of the stand by module press the Enter key and select Yes System Configuration 4 25 Monitoring Configuration Select monitoring Configuration on the Server menu and press Enter to display the following screen Option Parameter Description FRB 2 timer Disabled Select whether or not to enable the FRB 2 timer Enabled Boot Monitoring Disabled Select whether or not to enable the timer for boot 5 minutes monitoring at startup If you are starting up from an OS 10 minutes with n
218. ive Otherwise set No No BIOS Multiple LUN Support Yes Set No No Include in BIOS Scan Yes Set Yes No Factory set System Configuration 4 35 Advanced Configuration When you select Advanced Configuration and press the Enter key the display changes as shown below Advanced Configuration Reset SCSI Bus at IC Initialization Display lt Ctrl gt lt A gt Message During BIOS Initialization Extended Int 13 Translation for DOS Drivers gt 1GByte Post Display Mode Options Listed Below Have NO EFFECT if Int 13 Support is Disabled Domain Validation Enabled Support Removable Disk Under Int 13 as Fixed Disks Disabled BIOS Support for Bootable CD ROM Enabled SCSI Controller Int 13 Support Enabled The following table provides information on options and their functions Option Parameter Description Reset SCSI Bus at IC Enabled Set Enabled Initialization Disabled Display Ctrl Alt Message Enabled Set Enabled During BIOS Initialization Disabled Extended Int 13 Transfer for Enabled Set Enabled DOS Drivers gt 1 Gbyte Disabled Post Display Mode Verbose Do not change the settings unless it is Silent necessary Diagnostic SCSI Controller Int 13 Enabled Select whether or not to enable SCSI BIOS Support Disabled NOT Scan Select Enabled except Disabled scan bus when starting up the OS f
219. ive trademark owners The Dambrackas Video Compression algorithm from Avocent Corporation is used for ft Remote Management Card U S Patent Numbers 5 732 212 5 937 176 6 633 905 6 681 250 6 701 380 and other patents pending Taiwanese Patent Number 173784 European Patent Number 0 740 811 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition operating system and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition operating system are called Windows Server for short Microsoft Windows 2000 Server operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server operating system and Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system are called Windows 2000 for short Microsoft Windows NT Server network operating system version 3 51 4 0 and Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system version 3 51 4 0 are called Windows NT for short Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System is called Windows Me for short Microsoft Windows 98 operating system 1s called Windows 98 for short Microsoft Windows 95 operating system is called Windows 95 for short Names used with sample applications are all fictitious They are unrelated to any existing product names names of organizations or individual names Most of the software used for this server can be redistributed free under the terms of the BSD Copyright and the GNU Public License However there is software that requires permissions for redistribution as the owners have the ownership For details se
220. k A may be corrupted How the sd device name changes Disk A USB FDD Disk B Before disconnecting the system sda sdb sdc After disconnecting the system none sda sdc After connecting the system sdb sda sdc 1 Before disconnecting the system tar cf dev sdb files gt Files are written in USB FDD 2 After connecting the system tar cf dev sdb files Files are written into the disk A unintentionally gt Partitions are corrupted CHECK It is a specification of the NEC Express5800 ft series to change the device name of the device file when incorporating and disconnecting the system Chapter 4 System Configuration This chapter describes Basic Input Output System BIOS configuration When you install the Express5800 fault tolerant server for the first time or install remove optional devices thoroughly read this chapter for better understanding and correct setups 4 2 System Configuration SYSTEM BIOS SETUP The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server This utility is pre installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best conditions Thus you do not need to use the SETUP utility in most cases However you might wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below IMPORTANT m The SETUP utility is intended for system A
221. l LAN Card Configuration N8803 032 SCSI board List of slots to install optional PCI boards Refer to List of option PCI boards and installable slots on page 8 35 Driver installation procedure The driver for N8803 032 SCSI board is included in the OS so its installation is not necessary 8 40 System Upgrade N8803 033 Fibre Channel Board Set m List of slots to install optional PCI boards List of option PCI boards and installable slots on page 8 35 m Driver installation procedure The driver for N8803 033 Fibre Channel board is included in OS so its installation 1s not necessary However the following needs to be added under etc modprobe conf depending on your environment lt N8190 119 gt options lpfc lpfc_topology 0 lt Others gt options lpfc lpfc topology 6 After setup reboot the system Sync reboot IMPORTANT m StoragePathSavior is required for connecting NEC Storage using N8803 033 Fiber Channel boards m Mount N8803 033 Fibre Channel boards after completing the OS installation They are used in a pair or in a set of four Mount each controller on the slot of the same position of each PCI module Appendix A Specifications It NEC Express5800 320Fa L NEC Express5800 320Fa LR i N8800 090F EXP320B N8800 091F EXP320A CPU Type Intel Xeon Processor x 1 Clock second cache 3 2GHz 2MB Number of processors 1 processor the number of processors instal
222. led The confirmation message for the storage is displayed 5 Press Y to store Press N not to store 5 74 Installing and Using Utilities NEC DianaScope NEC DianaScope is software for remote management of the server For features and installation of NEC DianaScope see NEC DianaScope Online Document in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER t x oe poss Blueberry Server Propamne Ramata Comtral Remote Conse Pamats Dich IPM Infeumahon Item Spec fi c Hel p Re 1415 SHI 1 OS 2004 lt Tab gt Siit Tate or Ene selects tida fost 25w 3 D sabi eg TIPS To use NEC DianaScope with the server appropriate server license is required UL1198 001E DianaScope Additional Server License 1 License for managing one server UL1198 011E DianaScope Additional Server License 10 License for managing ten servers ft Remote Management Card comes with one license of NEC DianaScope Notes The online document provides general descriptions of overall severs to be remotely managed by NEC DianaScope but this section indicates notes that require special attention for remotely managing this server using NEC DianaScope Theserver can be managed remotely only when ft Remote Management Card is installed Whenremotely managing this server from NEC DianaScope only LAN connection is available Direct connection and connection via modem are not supported NEC DianaScope cannot power
223. led is selected the extended ROM of the Disabled slot device will be initialized PCI Slot 2 Option ROM Enabled Disabled PCI Slot 3 Option ROM Enabled Disabled I Factory set Not provided for the 320Fa L and 320Fa LR models System Configuration 4 15 SCSI Controller When you select SCSI Controller in the Advanced menu the following screen appears Refer to the table below for information on options Option Parameter Description SCSI Controller Enabled If Disabled is selected chip Disabled stays in the reset status In this status the SCSI Controller is totally disabled and not recognized by the PnP OS Option ROM Scan Enabled If Enabled is selected the Disabled extended ROM of the device will be initialized fFactory set 4 16 System Configuration LAN Controller When you select LAN Controller in the Advanced menu the following screen appears Refer to the table below for information on options Option Parameter Description LAN Controller Enabled If Disabled is selected chip stays Disabled in the reset status In this status the LAN Controller is totally disabled and not recognized by the PnP OS Option ROM Scan Enabled If Enabled is selected the Disabled extended ROM of the device will be initialized Factory set System Configuration 4 17 Advanced Chipset Control
224. led per module Maximum Up to 2 processors the number of processors installed per module Chipset GeminiEngine NEC original chipset Memory Standard None Maximum 6GB The standard DIMM must be replaced Expansion unit 2 DIMMs 512MB x 2 1GB x 2 Memory module DDR400 SDRAM DIMM Registered Type Error check ECC Graphics VRAM ES1000 32MB Auxiliary Floppy disk standard 3 5 inch drive x 1 USB input Hard disk standard None device Hard disk maximum 1 8TB 300GB x 6 The user area is reduced to a half of the physical capacity due to software mirroring CD ROM standard ATAPI interface x 1 Load on tray type x24 speed File bay 5 25 inch 2 slots None 3 5 inch 6 slots Additional PCI 64 bit 2 slots slot Low profile LAN interface 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T 2 ports External USB 4 pin connector 3 ports Keyboard occupies one port interface Network RJ 45 4 ports Display MINI D sub 15 pin 1 port Cabinet design Tower type Rack mount type External dimensions 310 mm w x 543 mm h x 715 mm d 485 w x 177 h x 635 d mm Weight 59 kg Max 66 kg 38 kg Max 47kg Power supply 100 to 120 VAC 10 200 to 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz 1 Hz Power consumption 829 VA 819 W Environmental In operation Temperature 10 to 35 C requirements Humidity 20 to 80 RH non condensing
225. lied from the UPS Select Server AC LINK StayOff Keyboard To set Num Lock and key repeat Select Advanced NumLock System Configuration 4 7 Security To set passwords on the BIOS level Select Security Set Supervisor Password and enter a password Set Supervisor password first then User password To enable disable the POWER switch Select Security Switch Inhibit Disabled POWER switch enabled Select Security Switch Inhibit Enabled POWER switch disabled IMPORTANT Masking the POWER switch disables forced shutdown as well as power on off using the POWER switch Optional PCl related devices To enable Option ROM of the PCI card option installed on the server Select Advanced PCI Configuration PCI Slot n Option rom Enabled n Slot number to install the board Boot To change the boot order of devices connected to the server Select Boot and specify the boot order To display POST check results Select Advanced Boot time Diagnostic Screen Enabled You can also press Ese while the NEC log is on the screen to display POST check results To control from the HW console m Remote operation via LAN Select Server Console Redirection and make necessary settings Memory To check the installed memory DIMM status Select Advanced Memory Configuration and check the status indications 4 8 System Configuration Saving the Configu
226. lly when LAN is connected only to the IO module on that side 5 52 Installing and Using Utilities Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager 1 TE 373 8737 E modena amp a Biel Fa zzi vel SRYERAI EFRO server 8 ring Upfiring Dose Press the Bring Up button to bring the Baton to beng tha OU Moshe dove ESI Press the Dump button to hold Dump ep Tyee Ue Theos Weed 1000 see Cmts Fats o Tena of et tous Undone Press the MEF Cinar button to dear periret o Teve of last nr Urinen Renki Press the Diagnentis button to ares e arr og Ern SO tree ee E Fere pen ri I D Wess 4 Maintenance screen of CPU module CPU Module CPU Module Maintenance Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager 2 SERVER 61 ESHPRO SEWER BI R MM aen Bl uneoxooam Le pem d rre e e mine J moe z Mode up press the Bring Down i mj a to bring the PCI Module down fro Down MTEF Information 1 Typ Use Threshold res 1800 See Garor Tadts o Tene of last fadt Uninonn Pross the Cer E me medium m iron i d PCH seoomwteoo PCI SietQ00 0 toj 108 SS Adgter 10 0 161109 Bp HAE peret BoardID 0j10 205 Pont m Bl permet BoarchID 0 20 205 Pert Mod esi SC51Endonre Press the Diagnostics button to m Spose the ICI Module Fer Help press F1 H e was NM n Maintenance screen of IO module PCI Module Maintenance
227. local server by using Server Maintenance Utility Not support Configure the System settings using the Server Maintenance Utility in the following procedure The system cannot be configured using the NEC ESMPRO Manager 1 Select System Setting on main window of the Server Maintenance Utility The System Setting screen is displayed Change the properties on the System Setting screen Select Apply Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility Tm System Action Setting Quick dump that is harvested at the same time of reboot a Enable Disable Automatic firmware update Enable Disable Automatic modue start Enable Disable System Setting screen Main window 5 70 Installing and Using Utilities BMC Firmware Update The firmware of the BMC on the PCI module can be updated The base management controller BMC is the processor exclusively used for monitoring the system s operating environment faults and controlling of the system The BMC firmware can be updated by using the BMC firmware update utility Both NEC ESMPRO Manager and the Server Maintenance Utility can start the BMC firmware update utility To update the BMC firmware the firmware image file must be updated on the managed server in advance On the BMC firmware update screen specify the path of the image file of the firmware to be updated The table below shows the potential cases in which the
228. lot 4 OL Slot 3 99494040994 9 0 0 0 0 0650596599999 95959595950 0599595096959595959959595939 RRO o8o8o8o8o8o B08 ooo3esc amp 2 Oo OO mom yA aD 250 0020209 08 080908090 8080 8020080 X 2020808 O 2 O9 Se oye e ope ee ll Foco5o5co5cooooooo5ccocooooooc5ccc5o5c5o5050505C 693 8o868s8s8e9o8o8s8s8o9o36858s8o9636368o9o9o3ecc4 2 o O9 0200090900 OW C090000000000000900000009009090909090909090902 0000000000000000000000 000000 2008886880 0 iu Slot 2 ERS Slot 1 Slot 0 DOG Op ODDO SOS dx 00099999000009 1059595050595 050 0909590909090 c 099595950960 595965960 8o8o3o3o3e8o8o3o8o 0G 9 G05 95959 G95 95 o o o o o o 0066 000 0 Slots to execute the mirroring process Empty slots in the 3 5 inch hard disk drive bay contain dummy trays The dummy trays are inserted to improve the cooling effect within the device Always insert the dummy trays in the slots in which hard disks are not installed Attach an HDD ID label indicating the slot number of installed hard disk to the handle of the hard disk 8 6 System Upgrade Installing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Follow the procedure below to install the hard disk A hard disk may be installed in another slot in the same procedure IMPORTANT Make sure to read ANTI STATIC MEASURES and PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE before starting installing or removing options
229. ly to ensure proper and safe use of the server For symbol meanings see SAFETY INDICATIONS described in the previous section General A WARNING S Do not use the equipment in an operation where human lives are involved or high reliability is required This equipment is not intended for use in controlling or use with facilities or systems where human lives are involved or high reliability is required including medical devices or nuclear aerospace transportation and traffic control facilities NEC assumes no liability for any accidents or damage to physical assets resulting from the use of this equipment in such systems or facilities Do not continue to use the equipment if you detect smoke odor or noise gt e If the equipment emits smoke odor or noise immediately flip off the POWER switch unplug the cord and contact your sales agent There is a risk of a fire Do not insert a wire or metal object Do not insert a wire or metal objects into a vent or disk drive slot There is a risk of an electric shock Do not use the equipment in an unsuitable place Do not install a server rack in an unsuitable environment Other systems also may be affected and the rack may fall over to cause a fire or injuries For details about installation environment and quake resistant engineering see the attached manual or contact your sales agent CAUTION Prevent water or foreign objects from getting into the equipm
230. m set dev hadb3 faulty in dev md2 mdadm hot removed dev hadb3 mdadm set dev hadbl faulty in dev md0 mdadm hot removed dev hadb1 Command Action 1 New Disks Remove Half Disk Repair Disk Remove Full Disks Status Raid Status All Disks lt Return ODO FB WN Status Raid Name Partition Status Member mdi simplex 0 hada2 md2 simplex 0 hada3 mdo boot simplex 0 hadal Command Action 1 New Disks Remove Half Disk Repair Disk Remove Full Disks Status Raid Status All Disks lt Return ODO PB C hN Command 9 Command 5 lt lt lt Confirm that the disk is disconnected from RAID gt gt gt Disconnecting a disk from the system and adding a new disk Command Action 1 gt RAID 2 gt SCSI 9 Quit Command 2 Command Action Linux Setup and Operation 3 7 Bring Down System Disk Bring Up System Disk Status System Disks lt Return WOWNE Command 1 Bring Down System Disk Which scsi SLOT 0 5 3 Command Action 1 Bring Down System Disk 2 Bring Up System Disk 3 Status System Disks 9 lt Return Command 3 lt lt lt Confirmthat thediskis disconnected fromthe system gt gt gt SCSI DISK STATUS SYSTEM slot name use serial path 0 hada 2 V3W1N8RA0050B5CL0399 hlcOtO1OACT h7cOtO1OHOT OO WNER 1 lt lt lt Confirm that no disk is configured to the target slot and replace the disk gt gt gt lt lt lt T
231. make sure there is enough space to store a new dump file Notes on Collecting diskdump The HDD access LED illuminates during dump collection The screen may remain blank even if dump is being collected Do not perform forced DC off BACKUP OF IPMI INFORMATION Collect the IPMI information NEC ESMPRO Agent must be installed to collect the information 1 Logon to the system as a user with a root authority 2 Move to the directory where the NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed Unless you have specified the installation destination it is installed in opt nec esmpro_sa In this description it is assumed to be installed in opt nec esmpro_sa cd opt nec esmpro sa 3 Move to the directory where tools are stored cd bin 7 40 Troubleshooting 4 Execute the following command xrasutil ESRAS Utility will start 5 Select lt Backup the current IPMI Information gt The IPMI Information Backup screen will appear 6 Enter an output destination and a comment and then select OK The information will be output to the specified location lt Backup File Name gt Specify the path to the file on which you want to save the information By default the information is output to log ipmi dat which is under the directory where NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed lt Comment gt Describe the information which you want to output with Optional For using the Server Maintenance Utility in Japanese run the command below before
232. me number are linked among the groups When a DIMM is added to one group another identical DIMM should be installed to the socket with the same number in another group This rule is applied to the case of removal m The linked DIMMs should be of the same product with the same performance m DIMMs should be installed in sockets from the lowest socket number to the highest socket number 8 22 System Upgrade Installing DIMM Follow the procedure below to install the DIMM 1 DE oe de 10 11 Shut down OS The sever turns off automatically Disconnect the power cords from the outlets Remove the CPU IO module referring to page 8 17 Check to be sure in which socket you are mounting the DIMM Remove the connector cover from the socket DIMM connector cover levers on both ends of the connector are opened the DIMM A DIMM connector cover is installed to the open socket When the X connector cover is unlocked and you can remove the cover IMPORTANT Keep the removed DIMM connector cover Insert a DIMM into the DIMM socket vertically TIPS Pay attention to the orientation of the DIMM The terminal of the DIMM has a cutout to prevent misinsertion After the DIMM is completely inserted into the socket the levers are automatically closed Mount the CPU IO module referring to page 8 19 Reattach the removed memory duct and secure it with the tree screws Connect the power cords Press
233. ment PC you can obtain the error information from the display unit of the server or management PC See Chapter 5 or online documentation for details of such application programs FI Server FI Server FI Server Ft Server Fi Sever Hm my TUE my TUE my Jue og Jue oy TUE oy Ue oy TUNE nne sp nne og st mm ny UE mom Troubleshooting 7 23 SOLVING PROBLEMS When the server fails to operate as expected see the following to find out your problem and follow the given instruction before asking for repair If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem take a note on the on screen message and contact your sales agent Problems with NEC Express5800 ft series Fail to power on the server O Is the server properly supplied with power Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet or UPS that meets the power specifications for the server Check if the two pieces of the provided power cord are connected to the main unit properly Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server Check the power cord for broken shield or bent plugs Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on Ifthe power cord is plugged to a UPS make sure the UPS is powered and it supplies power See the manual that comes with the UPS for details Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS setup utility of the server
234. module the following module State this canbe following module _ state this can be States this can be viewed on Server state this can be viewed on Server viewed on manager Maintenance Utility Viewed on manager Maintenance Utility screen screen screen screen e Removed e Removed Duplex e Duplex e Broken Broken e Shot e Shot e Firmware Update Firmware Update Complete Complete e Diagnostics e Diagnostics Passed Passed IO Module Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Remote Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager Local Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility IMPORTANT IO modules SCSI adapters SCSI buses and modules under the SCSI enclosure have impact on each other You need to be aware of this for example when you replace a CPU IO module For details see Impact of Module Status Changes described earlier in this chapter When starting modules ensure to start IO modules first and then CPU modules To start IO modules when CPU modules are running and IO modules are stopped the CPU modules must be stopped before starting IO modules CHECK Even if stoppage of a CPU module or IO module is requested the module will not be stopped if it is judged that the system would be unable to continue running It is the same for when the FT STATUS LED is off For example the module is not stopped when the CPU IO modules are succes
235. move the PCI bracket then remove the PCI board Replace the board and fasten it Install the CPU IO module referring to the page 8 19 Connect the network cable and cables for PCI boards The installed CPU IO module will start automatically p CCo Wer um ce de Confirm that the PCI board is correctly recognized by POST and OS System Upgrade 8 39 Setup of Optional PCI Board To enable the fault tolerant feature of the optional device the identical PCI boards must be installed to the slots with the same number in CPU IO module 0 and CPU IO module 1 The BIOS settings need to be modified when mounting some optional PCI boards To change the BIOS settings start the BIOS Setup Utility to change the Boot Monitoring configuration in Server Monitoring Configuration See Monitoring Configuration on page 4 25 for more details For the supported connecting devices contact your sales agent N8804 002 1000BASE T 1ch board set N8804 003 1000BASE SX 1ch board set N8804 004 1000BASE T 2ch board set IMPORTANT For LAN cable s connector use a RJ 45 connector which is compliant with IEC8877 standard If any other connector is used it may not be removed easily List of slots to install optional PCI boards Refer to List of option PCI boards and installable slots on page 8 35 Installation procedure NEC Express5800 ft series sets dual configuration with optional PCI boards in pairs See Step 6 Set Dua
236. n of syslog The log file of Linux is created under the following directory in text format var log The log file of NEC Express5800 ft series is also created in this directory as with general log file of Linux Collection of System Information The system information of Linux is recorded in syslog etc 7 38 Troubleshooting Collection of the Memory Dump If a failure occurs the memory data should be dumped to acquire the required information IMPORTANT m Consult with your sales agent before dumping the memory Executing memory dumping while the server is in the normal operation may affect the system operation m Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient virtual memory Ignore this message and proceed Restarting the system again may result in dumping improper data Preparing for Memory Dump Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart In such a case it is required to force the server to shut down This forced shutdown however is not available if Enabled is selected for Switch Inhibit on the Security menu of the BIOS Setup Utility SETUP because this setting disables POWER switch operation Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and reset the server 1 Power on the server and start the BIOS Setup Utility SETUP 2 Select Disabled for Switch Inhibit in the Security menu 3 Save
237. nce Allows the start stop MTBF information clear and dump acquisition of the CPU modules to be provided See Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series described later for the start stop and MTBF information clear of the CPU modules i oo e UR how Joe ty 00 0 Emaseo s amp a gt ld Sl o 7 zc Xl EM SERVEP B1 ESW 0 eg umen 5 I RES E cenery E ous CPU omc aon bring the CPU Mode down ergo i rr aisi Press tha Duro button to hoki Duo tw Markenance m m a Bl rcr sooo been 4 fd PCH segoa Type Use Threshold v BB Pcr Sonop amp B pct seoa amp E Pet SorqD 0r16 4 Bi rcr setltD 0 10 00 El Pct gelprunolioy PCI Se 10 0 10 102 pct seeqpsoriofus PCI Siee ID 0f 10 104 Pct skeao or1 08 amp Sl SCSI Adapter 10 0 16 104 mu 8 WE Uthernet Do ID 10 105 Porto Ethernet Board CID 0 10 LOS Port E po e M scst Enclosure Meror For Help press FL 5 26 Installing and Using Utilities m Update Allows the device identification information of the CPU modules to be viewed and BIOS of the CPU modules to be updated See Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series described later for the update of BIOS of the CPU modules The detailed device identification information can be checked by selecting ESMPRO tree Hardware tree Field Replaceable Unit tree m CPU Allows the information of the CPU on the CPU modules to be viewed m DIMM Allows
238. nd User Password of Main 4 20 System Configuration Server Move the cursor onto Server to display the Server menu The following describes options you can configure in the Server menu and their functions Select an option with the gt mark and press Enter to display its submenu Refer to the table below for information on options BMCIRQ Post Error Pause AC LINK Phomix BIOSS etup Utility Power ON D ely Time J Change Values Entr Select F9 S dup Ddaults b Sub Menu FIOS ave and Exit Option Parameter Description Thermal Disabled Enable or disable the thermal sensor Sensor Enabled functions BMC IRQ Disabled Set the IRQ of BMC interruption IRQ 11 Post Error Disabled Set whether or not to pause POST at the end Pause Enabled of POST if an error has occurred during POST execution AC LINK Stay Off Specify the AC LINK feature by selecting the Last State status of the power supply unit of the server Power On when the AC power supply restarts See the table on the next page for details Power ON 0 255 Configure the DC ON delay time if AC LINK Delay Time is set to Power On or Last State unit second Console Redirection is shown only when the N8815 001 001A ft Remote Management Card is installed Factory set System Configuration 4 21 The table below lists how selections for AC LINK determine the power status of the server
239. nd to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 5 2 Installing and Using Utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER integrated setup software can automatically detect the hardware connected to an NEC Express5800 ft series machine to advance the processing The hardware subject to setup with the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER should have the same configuration as that for operation Start Menu The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER provides three procedures to start the server as described below The menus and items appearing on the screen vary depending on the procedures m Booting starting the server from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM For the procedure insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM drive of the NEC Express5800 ft series and start the NEC Express5800 ft series from the system in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER When the NEC Express5800 ft series is started by using this procedure the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu shown on the right appears Perform the NEC Express5800 ft series setup from this menu IMPORTANT Do not use this CD ROM on computers other than NEC Express5800 ft series with which it is packaged including other NEC Express5800 models Otherwise a breakdown may result See NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu for details Installing and Using Utilities 5 3 m Inserting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM after Windows startup The Master Control Menu see the figure below start
240. ne or thinner causes damage to the CD ROM contents At worst inserting the CD ROM into the server may cause failure 6 6 Maintenance Cleaning Tape Drive Dirt on the tape head may be a cause of unsuccessful backup and damage to tape cartridge Clean the tape head regularly using a cleaning tape For procedure and interval of cleaning as well as lifetime of a tape cartridge to use see instructions included with the tape drive Maintenance 6 7 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server Select Tools System Diagnostics in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to diagnose the system Test Items The following items are tested in system diagnostics E Memory 7 CPU cache memory m Hard disk drive used as a system IMPORTANT When executing the system diagnostics make sure to remove the LAN cable Executing the system diagnostics with the LAN cable connected the network may be influenced TIPS On checking the hard disk drive no data is written into the disk Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics Follow the steps below to start the system diagnostics If the server is running shut it down and execute Step 1 through Step 12 1 2 3 4 Shutdown the OS and power off the server Then unplug the power cord Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server Plug the power cord and power on the server Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM to start the system Refer t
241. nect to a telephone line directly This port is also used for management by NEC DianaScope the management software shipped with the server B LINK ACT LED This LED indicates the network port status When power is supplied to this card and a connected device such as a hub and they are connected properly the LED illuminates in green LINK When the network port is sending receiving data successfully the LED blinks in green ACT E Speed LED This LED indicates the network interface on which network port s communication mode is running When the LED illuminates in amber it indicates the network interface is working on 100Mbps If the LED does not illuminate it indicates the network interface is working on 10Mbps 3 MAC address The label containing MAC address information is attached on the other side of this card You can also check the MAC address on the BIOS setup screen on the server 2 22 General Description LEDs This section describes indications and meanings of the LEDs on NEC Express5800 ft series See NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS pages 2 6 through 2 17 for the locations of each LED POWER LED This LED illuminates in green while the server is powered on When power is off this LED does not illuminate The LED also illuminates in green when one of CPU IO modules is powered on DISK ACCESS LED This LED indicates the status of hard disk drives loaded on 3 5 inch disk bays Whenever the hard disk drives are
242. net mask 19 r Invalid default gateway Use numbers and periods to specify a default gateway 20 Invalid DNS server IP address Use numbers and periods to specify the IP address of DNS server System Configuration 4 83 No Error message Action 21 1 You can use only alphanumeric characters minus Invalid host name sign and underscore for a host name A host name should be 64 characters or less 22 You can use only alphanumeric characters minus Invalid domain name sign and underscore for a domain name A domain name should be up to 128 characters 23 pa SMI Pserver address ist00 Specify the value within 128 characters 2 Invalid SMTP port number You can only use numeric values Invalid retry count You can only use numeric values Invalid retry interval You can only use numeric values i To is too long Specify the value within 128 characters From is too long Specify the value within 128 characters Subject is too long Specify the value within 256 characters d The message is too long The message should be up to 1024 characters 1 Failed to open the file The specified file may not exist Check the file name B Failed to close the file The specified file may be corrupted oe Can t open the file The specified file may not exist Check the file name 34 Timeout has occurred Try again If the error persists contact you
243. ng devices are connected to the primary CPU IO module by the hardware switch although those can be connected to both CPU IO modules 0 and 1 When one CPU IO module is disconnected because of a failure those are switched to the other module automatically and continue operating m VGA m CD ROM drive m USB device keyboard mouse floppy disk drive Floppy Disk Drive Option If you want to use a floppy disk drive with this server connect N8460 002USB FDD UNIT which are available optionally to a USB connector This server supports 3 5 inch 2HD 1 44 MB and 2DD 720KB floppy disks Insert Remove Floppy Disk Before inserting a floppy disk into the drive make sure that NEC Express5800 ft series is on the POWER LED illuminates Insert a floppy disk into the drive firmly until it snaps in place The eject button of the drive is then raised slightly CHECK m You cannot use 1 2 MB formatted disks m If you insert an unformatted disk you will see a message that the disk cannot be read or that needs formatting To format a floppy disk see your OS manual m If you power on or restart NEC Express5800 ft series with a floppy disk left in the drive the server will access the floppy disk to start the system Unless a system exits on the FD the server will be unable to start m When using a USB floppy disk drive the access to the floppy disk is delayed on rare occasions 1f the display graphic load is high because a moving pictur
244. ng with the server A CAUTION Q Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of fire personal injury or property damage See PRECAUTIONS A A FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1 for details Do not install or remove components by a single person Do not install the server leaving the cover removed Make sure to complete component installation Do not pinch your finger s High temperature System Upgrade 8 3 ANTI STATIC MEASURES The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity Avoid failures caused by static electricity when installing or removing any optional devices Wear wrist straps arm belts or anti static gloves Wear wrist straps on your wrists If no wrist strap is available touch an unpainted metal part of the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your body Touch the metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static electricity Select a suitable workspace Work with the server on the anti static or concrete floor When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be generated make sure take anti static measures beforehand Use a worktable Place the server on an anti static mat to work with it Clothes Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server Wear anti static shoes to work with the server Take off any me
245. nge the underlined values on the previous page to those below The settings may vary depending on the keyboard you use lt For US keyboard gt Before changed Option XkbModel jp106 Option XkbLayout jp After changed Option XkbModel us101 Option XkbLayout us For the same setting as text console Before changed Option XkbModel jp106 Option XkbLayout jp After changed Option XkbDisable 4 Restart X Window System with Ctrl Alt BackSpace after changing the settings IMPORTANT W Change only the underlined sections If you change the Screen section the setting of X Window System may become incorrect 3 16 Linux Setup and Operation ACCESSING USB FDD Access USB FDD after the device is mounted How to mount mount media floppy TIPS If mount point is not automatically created the service needs to be started again Run the following commands sequentially to start the service etc init d messagebus restart etc init d haldaemon restart Notes When accessing USB FDD by directly specifying the sd device name as in the example below the device name may be changed if the system is disconnected or connected and the data on partitions of other disks may be corrupted unintentionally Example When commands are run on USB FDD after connecting the system by using the same sd device name as the one specified before it was disconnected data on the partition of the dis
246. ngers Exercise great care not to hurt your fingers on the rail when you mount dismount the equipment into from the rack Do not use or store this product in corrosive environment Avoid the usage or storage of this product in an environment which may be exposed to corrosive gases such as those including but not limited to sulfur dioxide hydrogen sulfide nitrogen dioxide chlorine ammonia and or ozone Avoid installing this product in a dusty environment or one that may be exposed to corrosive materials such as sodium chloride and or sulfur Avoid installing this product in an environment which may have excessive metal flakes or conductive particles in the air Such environments may cause corrosion or short circuits within this product resulting in not only damage to this product but may even lead to be a fire hazard If there are any concerns regarding the environment at the planned site of installation or storage please contact your sales agent 1 8 Precautions for Use A CAUTION D gt Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power outlet before installing removing any optional internal device or connecting disconnecting any interface cable to from the server If the server is off powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source touching an internal device cable or connect
247. no message appears the network is successfully duplexed If the standard device names for Linux such as eth0 eth1 are assigned to Ether devices the network is not duplexed ifconfig a grep eth eth0 Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 XX XX XX XX XX eth Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 YY YY YY YY YY 2 Run udevstart All the Linux standard device names will be renamed to the ones for your NEC Express5800 ft series such as e08030 e13030 and the network is duplexed 3 Run ifconfig a grep eth again to confirm that no message appears Troubleshooting 7 31 Event Log HAS Daemon related logs are recorded in the system event log When you manage servers using NEC ESMPRO Manager the following message may be recorded in the system event log This message does not indicate an event that impacts operations However if it is recorded frequently there may be problem in OS or the software environment Contact your sales agent Source HAS Daemon Type Warning Event ID 800000cc 800000d2 The following message may be recorded in the system event log for operation or replacement maintenance of each network adapter SCSI disk or fibre channel This message does not indicate an event that impacts operations However if it is recorded frequently or even when maintenance procedures are followed there may be problem in OS or the software environment Contact your sales agent Source HAS Daemon Type Warning
248. o NEC EXPRESSBUILDER of Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities to start the system properly NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu is displayed on the screen when starting the system from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 6 8 Maintenance NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Express Setup NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu Select Tools Select System Diagnostics The system diagnostics starts and will be completed in approximately three minutes When the diagnostics is completed the screen of the display changes as shown below Diagnostics tool title TeDoLi TEst amp Diagnosis On Linux Ver001 00 Build020901 1 1m Test End NormalEnd lt System gt MEM Memory CACHE Cache lt SCSI gt Test End Start 10 06 58 End 10 09 58 Pass 000 03 00 TestTime 000 03 00 03 AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00 l6count NormalEnd 49 count NormalEnd HDD 02 000 DK32DJ 36W 89 count NormalEnd Enter Detail Information ESC Return to Enduser Menu Diagnostics tool title Guideline Shows the name and version of the diagnostic tool Test window title Test window title Test result Test summary window Shows the progress of the diagnostics Test End is displayed when the diagnostics completes Test result Shows the start end and elapsed time and completion status of the diagnostics Maintenance 6 9 Guideline Shows the details of the keys to operate window Test summary window Shows the
249. o NEC ESMPRO Agent installed disable this 15 minutes option If you use Disaster Recovery Option for 20 minutes ARCServe select Disabled 25 minutes 30 minutes 35 minutes 40 minutes 45 minutes 50 minutes 55 minutes 60 minutes Option ROM Scan Disabled Select whether or not to enable the function to monitor Monitoring Enabled the option ROM scan Option ROM 1 5 20 Set the timeout of the option ROM scan This option is Monitoring Time out displayed when the Option ROM Scan menu is set to Enabled unit minute POST Pause Disabled Set whether or not to enable the POST monitoring Monitoring Enabled function during boot pause POST Pause 1 3 20 Set the time for POST monitoring during boot pause Monitoring Time out This option is displayed when the POST Pause Monitoring menu is set to Enabled unit minute Factory set 4 26 System Configuration Boot Move the cursor onto Boot to display the Boot menu The server searches for the boot device according to the order specified in this menu and use the software to boot the system if found Main Advanced CD ROM Drive You can change the boot device order using or and or Move the cursor to select the device by or J and then change the priority using or IMPORTANT Specify the device boot order as shown above to start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER System Configuration 4 27 Exit Move the cursor onto Exit to
250. occurred in a server is immediately reported to the Alert Viewer The Administrator can recognize all faults on the network instantly ee AlertViewer of x File Edit View Tools Help sjej ape oo ee 1H Server x Recovery mgr_TUN 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM ESMCommon5ervice FT Server i 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server y 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server m 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server eco 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server eae 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server TUNE 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb FT Server a eee 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb Network vee 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM E1008 FT Server sss sss 127 0 0 1 06 28 2001 11 43 AM srabb IISTRATUS MSG STATE REMO E STRATUS MSG STATE ONLINE IBISTRATUS MSG STATE REMO E STRATUS M5G STATE DUPLEX jsTRATUS MG STATE EMPTY STRATUS MSG STATE ONLINE STRATUS MSG STATE EMPTY STRATUS M5G STATE ONLINE STRATUS M5G STATE EMPTY STRATUS M5G STATE ONLINE BISTRATUS MSG STATE ONLINE EIdETHERNET EROKEN MEDIA D STRATUS MSG STATE DUPLEX EEEEEEEEEEEEEERS 5 16 Installing and Using Utilities NEC ESMPRO Agent NEC ESMPRO Agent is a utility which acts as an agent proxy between NE
251. of USB device to a driver Failed to report the completion of the USB removal to the HAS driver It failed in the start of snapshot dump There was an error when starting the active dumpr service It failed in the start of stop image dump There was an error when starting the stopped dump service It failed in the start of quick dump There was an error when starting the quick dump service Contact your sales agent It failed in the setting of the FC watch library Failed to read and set FC duplexity monitoring library It failed in the setting of the SCSI watch library Failed to read and set SCSI duplexity monitoring library It failed in the setting of the NIC watch library Failed to read and set network duplexity monitoring library If failed in the initialization of a device doubleness surveillance event Failed to initialize the duplexity monitoring event It failed in the initialization of a timer Failed to initialize and set the timer for monitoring duplexity If failed in the daemon start Failed to start the HAS monitoring service Restart the system If the error occurs frequently contact your sales agent 7 22 Troubleshooting Server Management Application Error Message If the server management tool such as NEC T ar ESMPRO Agent or NEC ESMPRO Manager has gp niv been installed in the NEC Express5800 ft series or manage
252. omatically acquire the IP address of the DNS server by DHCP 2 Ifyou have selected not to automatically acquire the IP address by DCHP make settings here If the address is acquired automatically by DHCP the acquired address appears here System Configuration 4 67 Host name LWE Network Settings TAN DNS Hostname Default Hostname ARMCOOO04C9F13CA osmane sapphire bmc e Name abmc sample net O a Register hostname to DNS Server 1 The default host name to be used when no host name is set when DHCP is used 2 Set the BMC host name If this option is not configured the default host name mentioned in 1 will be used 3 Setthe domain name of the network to which the BMC belongs 4 Choose whether or not to register the host name with the DNS server TIPS It is recommended to set the BMC host name to be easily guessed from the server s host name on the OS For example you may set the BMC host name as sapphire bmc if the server s host name on the OS is sapphire IMPORTANT Specify different host names to CPU IO module 0 and CPU IO module 1 When you click OK all of what you have set in the three tabs will be written into the BMC When you click Cancel the editing window closes without saving what you have edited 4 68 System Configuration WEB server settings Here you can make web server settings such a
253. onfigure the transfer speed of SCSI devices connected to the server except hard disk drive and allows you to make settings IMPORTANT SCSI configuration must be set by starting up the utility on a SCSI controller basis The server is equipped with one SCSI controller If you have added SCSI controller boards you need to make SCSI controller settings as many as the number of added SCSI controller boards in addition to the configuration for the built in SCSI controller The utility used for changing settings may be different Starting and Quitting the SCSISelect utility The following section describes the procedures from starting the SCSISe ect utility to quitting the utility For information on how you start up and or operate the utility stored on the option board see the manual shipped with the option board 1 Power on the server The following message appears on the screen during POST execution IMPORTANT The message is repeated for the number of times as many as the number of SCSI controllers installed Adaptec SCSI BIOS vX XX Copyright 2004 Adaptec Inc ALL Rights Reserved 4 4 Press lt Ctrl gt N for SCSISelect TM Utility b b b 2 Press and hold down the Ctrl key and press the N key The SCSISe ect utility starts up with the Main menu displayed System Configuration 4 31 3 Use the cursor to select a channel in the Bus Device box and then press the Enter key AIC 7902 A a
254. ontact your sales agent Linux Error Messages Troubleshooting 7 13 NEC Express5800 ft series displays messages on the console window when failures occur Also the same information is recorded as system logs The following indicates the syslog messages messages on the console their meanings and actions Message Meaning Action The driver started successfully The driver was successfully started The driver stopped The driver was successfully terminated The server is operating normally The driver failed to start The driver was not started successfully There may be problem in the system environment Contact your sales agent The driver finished successfully to unload The unload processing of the driver finished successfully The driver accepted to bind the CPU module The driver received an instruction to bind the CPU module The driver started to bind the CPU module The driver started binding the CPU module The friver finished successfully to bind the CPU module The driver successfully bound the CPU module The server is operating normally The driver failed to bind the CPU module The driver was unsuccessful to bind the CPU module If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver accepted to remove the CPU module The driver received an inst
255. oppy disks that contain important data Write Protect except when you write data to the floppy disk To Switch write protect a 3 5 inch floppy disk slide the Unreadable Readable write protect notch located on its back The floppy disk is a very delicate storage medium Dust or changes in temperature could cause data to be lost Data loss could also be caused by faulty operation and computer trouble To avoid such possible data loss it is recommendable to back up important data regularly Be sure to make back up copies of the floppy disks that are included with NEC Express5800 ft series 2 36 General Description CD ROM Drive NEC Express5800 ft series has a CD ROM drive on the front panel It is a device used to read data from a CD ROM compact disc read only memory Compared to a floppy disk a CD ROM allows for larger volume and fast data readout A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of a burn injury or damage to physical assets For details see PRECAUTIONS S FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1 W Do not leave the CD tray ejected Insert Remove CD ROM Follow the steps below to set a CD ROM 1 Before you insert a CD ROM make sure that the server is powered on When the server is powered on the LED illuminates in green 2 Press the CD tray eject button located in the front of the CD ROM drive The tray is then ejected 3 Hold the CD ROM with its si
256. or faces the back of the rack and engage the guides of the module and chassis and insert it slowly 2 Hold the handle to push the module as far as it goes Handle 3 Putthe handle back in the position where it was The installed CPU IO module will start automatically IMPORTANT Connect the cables that you disconnected before removing the CPU IO module to where they were originally connected Connect cables while the handle is leaned toward you 4 Secure the handle with the screws IMPORTANT m Secure the handle with the screws If it is not secured by the screws the CPU IO will not be powered on m In some system statuses or settings auto start up or integration does not take place when the module is connected In such a case check the status by using the Server Maintenance Utility or NEC ESMPRO Manager data viewer and then power on by the module POWER switch or start up the IO and CPU modules m After installing CPU IO module always power on the module using the power switch 8 20 System Upgrade DIMM The DIMM dual inline memory module is installed to the DIMM socket in the CPU IO module on the NEC Express5800 ft series The CPU IO module board is equipped with six sockets Two DIMMS are installed on the DIMM slot Al and B1 as standard equipment The standard DIMMs can be replaced with other DIMMs 320Fa L and 320Fa LR models 512MB DIMMx2 DIMMs should be installed to these sockets
257. or may cause an electric shock or a fire resulted from a short circuit Do not use any non designated interface cable Use only interface cables designated by NEC identify which component or connector to attach beforehand If you use a wrong cable or make a wrong connection there is a risk of short circuit that could lead to a fire You also have to observe the following prohibitions about handling and connecting interface cables W Do not use any damaged cable connector Do not step on the cable Do not place any object on the cable Do not use the equipment with loose cable connections Do not use any damaged cable Precautions for Use 1 9 Cleaning and Handling of Internal Devices gt BO BB Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Unless described herein never attempt to disassemble repair or alter the equipment There is a risk of an electric shock or fire as well as malfunction Do not look into the CD ROM drive The CD ROM drive uses a laser beam Do not look or insert a mirror inside while the system is on A laser beam is invisible if your eyes get exposed to it there is a risk of losing eyesight Do not detach a lithium battery yourself This equipment has a lithium battery Do not detach it yourself If the battery is exposed to fire or water it could explode When the lithium battery is running down and the equipment does not work correctly contact your sales agent instead of d
258. ormal shutdown from Linux by running the shutdown command Press the POWER switch to power off the server 2 Power off all peripheral devices POST Check POST power on self test is a self test function stored on the motherboard of NEC Express5800 ft series When you power on the server POST will start automatically to check the motherboard ECC memory modules CPU modules keyboard mouse etc It also shows startup messages for various BIOS setup utilities According to the factory default settings the NEC logo appears on the display while POST is being performed To view POST s details press Esc TIPS m You can view POST details from the beginning without the need to press Esc when the BIOS menu is displayed select System Configuration Advanced and set Boot time Diagnostic Screen to Enabled see Chapter 4 m You can view the test items and details from a management PC where NEC ESMPRO Manager or NEC DianaScope is installed You do not always need to check POST details You will need to check messages when m Youinstall a new NEC Express5800 ft series m A failure is suspected m You hear several beeps between the time of the power on and OS start up m The display unit shows an error message 2 32 General Description Flow of POST This section walks you through how POST is performed 1 When you power on the system one selected CPU PCI module will start up POST will be performe
259. pleted to bind the IO module The IO module has already been bound The driver has already completed to remove the IO module The IO module has already been disconnected The driver has already completed to remove the Module The module has alrady been disconnected The server is operating normally The driver was not able to bind the Module It has broken down in the past The module cannot be bound because it has failed in the past The driver was not able to bind PCI Express 0 It has broken down in the past The PCI Express 0 cannot be bound because it has failed in the past The driver was not able to bind PCI Express 1 It has broken down in the past The PCI Express 1 cannot be bound because it has failed in the past The driver was not able to bind South Bridge It has broken down in the past The South Bridge cannot be bound because it has failed in the past The error occurred on the PXH There was an error in PXH The error occurred on the device belong with the PXH There was an error in a device that belongs to PXH There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent Device is not duplexing The device is not duplexed Take necessary actions referring to Troubleshooting in the User s Guide The driver started to clear the MTBF The driver started clearing MTBF The driver finished successfully to cl
260. port JAVA HOME usr java j2rel 4 2 09 For tesh setenv JAVA HOME usr java j2rel 4 2 09 6 Set the path to JRE For bash export PATH JAVA HOME bin PATH For tesh setenv PATH JAVA_HOME bin PATH IMPORTANT For the Mozilla browser create a symbolic link to the Java Plug in in the Mozilla plugins directory If you want to install the latest Java Runtime download it from the following site If you use NEC DianaScope on the same management PC use Java2 Runtime Environment which you can find in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM http java sun com j2se If you access the logon page without installing Java2 Runtime Environment the following message may appear Check the message and perform installation Internet Explorer Security Warnine Do you want to install this software Name jinstall 1_4 windows i586 cab Publisher Sun Microsystems Inc rere re rice While Files from the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer Only install software from publishers you trust What s the risk 4 48 System Configuration Using Remote Management Overview You can control power of this server and use the remote KVM console from a web browser by using web server functions of BMC This function is achieved by Java Applet How to get connected From a Web browser on the management PC access the following URL URL http BMC HostPort index htm TIPS m BMC HostPort is a
261. r Use aeea a eerie i aaeain 1 1 WARNING EADBELS ioter qe e Pa qd en Pa qe a OE WR ERR ER i 1 2 SETVer CHASSIS se quere ate ea da che be a edet a bei ee at gus 1 2 CPU ATO m odulesz4 det e eene iit e REG NE 1 3 CPU IO modules ee eret eei deese E r heise RE eis 1 4 PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY en AAEE tene ener teen 1 5 Generalz 5 asthe AE Ri Le NUNS eo PS MAT dd 38 ois S E E MUN odit t ME ok 1 5 Use of Power Supply and Power Cord pp 1 6 Installation Relocation Storage and Connection sse 1 7 Cleaning and Handling of Internal DeVviceS Ne 1 9 During Operation onset e C OON RR OO RR tes 1 10 Rack mount Model 4 eee eet eter e fene ee Tei ier Piet 1 11 For Proper OQperation s r re ie ERE T i P Fi HER edes 1 12 Voc B EL MARRE EM 1 14 uci 1 14 am DEREN ER EON 1 15 LC EET UEED I2 20 00 P 1 16 l LE EEE E E eae eno a e Ans 1 17 MUERE uU Dd E cd eee nC ee 1 18 DISPOSAL OF EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES sees 1 21 IF SYSTEM TROUBLE SUSPECTED mp nn a a 1 22 ABOUT REPAIR PARTS dtt AT a na EE RE U RENI 1 22 ABOUT OUR WEB SERVIGE niter rere ree eee e RU or eee E A 1 22 Chapter 2 General Description ee 2 1 STANDARD FEATURES p00 ee 2 2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS pp 2 6 Front View a L st a ne E 2 7 CD ROM Dr nt ne a te ee A sep 2
262. r each system scsi0 Someone reset channel A a1c79xx scsi occur Hardware error interrupt scsi hwerrint Discard Timer has timed out scsi Recovery Initiated Card was paused scsi Recovery Initiated Card was not pausedA timeout occurred for waiting 662699 When unmounting a module gt is different for each system scsi Recovery Initiated Card was paused scsi Recovery Initiated Card was not paused scsi Recovery Initiated Card was paused not connected scsi Recovery Initiated Card was not paused not connected scsi A 0 0 SCB 0x0 timed out scsi A 0 0 Other SCB Timeout scsi A 0 0 No other SCB worth waiting for aic79xx scsi HBA seems to be removed 7 34 Troubleshooting aic79xx scsi start to remove the HBA aic79xx scsi unregister SCSI host on kernel aic79xx scsi SCSI host was unregisterd aic79xx scsi HBA was removed aic79xx scsi ahd_stat_timer HBA was lost aic79xx scsi Reject the request adapter was already removed aic79xx scsi Reject the request adapter lost not notified to remove yet FC related logs are recorded to the system event log FC driver records mounting and unmounting of a module in the system event log but these events do not affect the system However if they are recorded for over 5 minutes contact your sales agent lt When mounting a module gt n and x are different for each system Ipfc nnnn nn nn
263. r service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC Firmware update errors No Error message Action 1 bis ar uncompleted update Reboot the server to complete the update images on BMC as follows 2 Failed to acquire status of the The network may be busy Try again If the error persists contact your service representative because update area i a failure may have occurred in BMC 3 Update data is too large Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 4 The network may be busy Try again If the error Failed to prepare update persists contact your service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC 5 1 Invalid file size The update file may be corrupted Obtain the update file again 6 Could not find the revision Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update information files again 4 84 System Configuration No Error message Action 7 Try again If the error persists contact your service Failed to create rollback image representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC 8 Try again If the error persists contact your service Failed to erase representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC 9 Unsupported format version Some update files may be corrupted Obtain update files again 10 Failed to load the update image Some up
264. r with the cloth prepared in Step 4 6 Soak a soft cloth in water squeeze it firmly and wipe the server with it once again 6 4 Maintenance 7 Wipe the server with a dry cloth 8 Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse IMPORTANT A keyboard and a mouse use USB interface Therefore it is not necessary to power off the server when connecting or disconnecting them Disconnect the keyboard from the server while the devices in the system the server and the peripheral devices remain turned on Wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth Then connect the keyboard to the server The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation To keep the mouse ball clean use the mouse in a place with little dust Follow the steps below to clean the mouse regularly 1 Disconnect the mouse from the USB hub of the keyboard while the server remains powered on 2 Turn the mouse upside down and rotate the mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove it Take out the ball from the mouse Mouse Mouse ball 3 Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth If stains remain use a soft cloth to wipe them off Soak the soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with water or warm water and squeeze it firmly 4 Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with Mouse cover cotton swab Use the cotton swab soaked with al
265. ration Data To save the BIOS configuration data Select Exit Exit Saving Changes To discard changes to the BIOS configuration data Select Exit Exit Discarding Changes To restore the default BIOS configuration data the data may differ from the factory setting Select Exit Load Setup Defaults System Configuration 4 9 Menu and Parameter Descriptions The SETUP utility has the following six major menus m Main m Advanced m Security m Server m Boot m Exit To configure detailed settings of functions select a submenu from the above menus Below describes configurable functions and parameters and the factory settings displayed in the screen for each menu Main Start the SETUP utility to display the Main menu When you select a menu with the mark and press the Enter key its submenu appears Example Main Advancod Socurity 4 10 System Configuration Available options in the Main and descriptions are listed below Option Parameter Description System Time HH MM SS Specify the system time System Date MM DD YYYY Specify the system date factory set IMPORTANT Check and adjust the system clock before operation in the following conditions After transporting the equipment After storing the equipment After the equipment halt under the conditions which is out of the guranteed environment conditions Temperature 10 to 35 C Humidity 20 to
266. re NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense ol ze d 42z2 AAAH ANAL woz EE ARAL e d FAAN sep web zx wp xz PAAS Hos Aso 33814 7 ubere This class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num riqeu de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada CE Statement Warning This is a Class A product In residential environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures EN55022 This system
267. re of 1st Processor OBC1 POST detected startup failure of 2nd Processor CPU is faulty Replace the CPU 8120 Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM group 1 8121 Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM group 8122 Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM group 3 Unsupported DIMM is mounted 8130 Mismatch DIMM detected in DIMM group 1 8131 Mismatch DIMM detected in DIMM group 2 8132 Mismatch DIMM detected in DIMM group 3 DIMM group do not match Check supported DIMMs and replace the DIMM If replacing the DIMM does not help replace the CPU IO module 8150 NVRAM Cleared By CMOS clear jumper is Jumper mounted 8151 Password Cleared By Password clear jumper is Jumper mounted Turn off the DC power and change back the jumper setting 8160 Mismatch Processor Speed detected on Processor 1 8161 Mismatch Processor Speed detected on Processor 2 CPU frequency does not match 8170 Processor 1 not operating at intended frequency CPU frequency is incorrect Check supported CPUs and replace the CPU If replacing the CPU does not help replace CPU IO module 7 8 Troubleshooting On screen error message Cause Action 8171 Processor 2 not operating at intended CPU frequency is incorrect frequency 9064 Mixed CPU Steppings Different CPU steppings are detected found Check supported CPUs and replace the CPU If replacing the CPU
268. rence Always Restart Always restarts the device at a fault occurrence Threshold Threshold of MTBF Current Current MTBF value Faults Number of faults Time of last fault Time of the last fault When there is none is displayed Firmware contains the following information Item Description Version Version of the firmware System BIOS Additional Additional information of the firmware System BIOS The version information of the firmware is displayed only when the lt Version gt button is pressed The following buttons are displayed for CPU Module Item Description MTBF Info Displays MTBF information Clear Clears the MTBF information of the CPU module Up Starts the CPU module When you also start the PCI module of the same module start the PCI module before the CPU module Down Stops the CPU module Version Displays the version of the firmware Update Updates the firmware System BIOS Switch Switches the board Start the IO module and the CPU module of the sopped module respectively and make modules duplex Then stop the other module s CPU module and IO module respectively Use this function when updating the firmware BIOS This function is available for a module which CPU and PCI IO modules are stopped Harvest Collects dump Before clicking this button select one of the methods of to collect dump e Save memory dump of the stopped module e
269. results of each test that executed the diagnostics Move the cursor and press the Enter key on the cursor line to display the details of the test When an error is detected by the system diagnostics the relevant test result in the test summary window is highlighted in red and Abnormal End is displayed in the result on the right side Move the cursor to the test that detected the error and press the Enter key Record the error message that has been output to the Detail Information screen and contact your sales agent Follow the guideline shown at the bottom of the screen and press the Esc key The Enduser Menu below is displayed TeDoLi TEst amp Diagnosis On Linux Ver001 00 Build020901 1 1m Enduser Menu lt Test Result gt lt Device List gt lt Log Info gt lt Option gt lt Reboot gt Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key lt Test Result gt Shows the diagnostics completion screen of the above diagnostics lt Device List gt Shows a list of connected devices lt Log Info gt Shows the log information of the diagnostics It can be saved on a floppy disk To save it on a floppy disk insert a formatted floppy disk to the floppy disk drive and select lt Save F gt lt Option gt Changes the output destination of a log lt Reboot gt Reboots the system Select lt Reboot gt in the Enduser Menu above The server restarts and the system is started from
270. ring continuous operation Replacing the Hard Disk Drive 1 Locate the failed hard disk When a hard disk fails the DISK LED on the hard disk drive s handle illuminates amber The DISK Access LED of the amber lit disk also illuminates amber Remove the failed hard disk referring to REPLACING 3 5 INCH HARD DISK DRIVE on page 3 3 and Removing 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive on page 8 8 No need to shutdown Linux Refer to the steps in Installing the hard disk to install a new hard disk TIPS m The hard disk to be installed for replacement must have the same specifications as its mirroring hard disk mUse an unsigned hard disk to replace the failed one If you use a signed disk you need to restore the redundant configuration in the procedure of How to Restore Redundant Configuration Manually below 4 Restore the redundant configuration see Chapter 3 8 10 System Upgrade RAID CONFIGURATION WHEN DISKS ARE ADDED Use ftdiskadm to configure RAID when disks are added From SCSI Bring Up specify slot numbers and add the disks to the system Then from RAID New Disks configure RAID Following is an example of adding disks to Slot 2 and Slot 5 using ftdiskadm Example of adding disks to the system tdiskadm Command Action 1 gt RAID 2 gt SCSI 9 Quit Command 2 Command Action 1 Bring Down System Disk 2 Bring Up System Disk 3 Status System Disks
271. rity of the CPU module The driver successfully changed the priority of the CPU module The server is operating normally The driver failed to change the priority of the CPU module The driver was unsuccessful to change the priority of the CPU module There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver accepted to bind the IO module The driver received an instruction to bind the IO module The driver started to bind the IO module The driver started binding the IO module The driver finished successfully to bind the IO module The driver successfully bound the IO module The server is operating normally The driver failed to bind the IO module The driver was unsuccessful to bind the IO module There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver accepted to remove the IO module The driver received an instruction to disconnect the IO module The driver started to remove the IO module The driver started disconnecting the IO module The driver finished successfully to remove the IO module The driver successfully disconnected the IO module The server is operating normally The driver failed to remove the IO module The driver was unsuccessful to disconnect the IO module There may be problem of hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver accepted to switch
272. rmed this LED blinks in amber CPU IO module Z1 status LED This LED indicates the status of the CPU IO module 1 see page 2 24 When the module is running successfully the LED illuminates in green If the module has a problem the LED blinks in green illuminates in amber or blinks in amber CPU IO module Z0 status LED This LED indicates the status of the CPU IO module 0 see page 2 24 When the module is running successfully the LED illuminates in green If the module has a problem the LED blinks in green illuminates in amber or blinks in amber 2 12 General Description 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 UID LED blue This LED blinks by a command from software POWER switch This switch is used to power on off the server The POWER LED illuminates and the server is powered on when this switch is pressed once see page 2 30 The power supply is turned off when the switch is pressed once again see page 2 31 Pressing this button for 4 or more seconds shuts down the server forcefully see page 4 37 DUMP NMD switch This switch is used to perform memory dump USB1 connector This connector is used for connecting devices supporting the USB1 1 interface Hard disk drive bays These bays are used to install hard disk drives see page 8 6 The numbers following represent SCSI IDs CD ROM drive This device is used to read data from CD RO
273. rmware update 1 The advance of the update appears during update At the termination of update the update result is displayed 5 Click OK x Firmware update completed normally 5 72 Installing and Using Utilities Procedure of Update from the Server Maintenance Utility Update the firmware in the procedure as follows 1 Select Firmware on the main window of the Server 1 ESHECIHIETEEENUMIIIT Maintenance Utility The Firmware Update screen appears 2 Select Update The BMC FW update Tool screen appears 3 Select BMC FW update Command menu and press Enter The firmware will be updated Installing and Using Utilities 5 73 Changing Update Data Storage Destination Change the storage destination by using the Server Maintenance Utility in the procedure below 1 Select Firmware on the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility The Firmware Update screen appears 2 Select Update The BMC FW update Tool screen Firmware Update Ee appears E 3 Select BMC FW update Property Setting menu and then press Enter The BMC FW update Service Property Setting screen appears 4 Enter the storage destination in Data File Path and then click Data save and Exit If you click Cancel and Exit the property setting will be finished with the updated data cance
274. roller is detected a message will appear prompting for startup of SCSI BIOS setup utility If you wait for a few seconds POST will go on automatically If you press Ctrl N the SCSI BIOS setup utility will start For setting and parameter functions see SCSI BIOS SCSISelect page 4 30 You will need to use this utility for example when you have changed the server s internal SCSI device connections However you usually do not need to use it When SETUP is complete the server will reboot automatically and perform POST again If multiple SCSI controller boards are mounted on the PCI bus the SCSI BIOS startup message will appear for these boards in numerical order PCI 1 PCI 2 PCI 3 The screen shows SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices General Description 2 33 7 Upon completion of POST the password entry screen appears prior to OS startup The password entry screen will appear after the normal termination of POST only if you have set a password in the BIOS setup utility SETUP You can enter a password up to three times If you enter an incorrect password three times the startup will be unsuccessful In this case turn off the power and then turn it on again after waiting 30 seconds to boot the server IMPORTANT Do not set a password before installing the OS 8 Upon completion of POST the OS will start up Behavior at Occurrence of Error If POST or OS startup does no
275. rom a hard disk drive other than those connected to the SCSI controller it is OK if no hard disk drive is connected to controller other than SCSI controller when reserving a space in the extended ROM space In this case you can disable the BIOS of a SCSI controller to which no hard disk drive is connected Domain Validation Enabled Set Enabled Disabled Support Removable Disks Boot Only Options controlled by removable media are under Int 13 as Fixed Disks All Disks supported by AIC 79xx BIOS Disabled BIOS Support for Bootable Enabled Set Enabled CD ROM Disabled Factory set 4 36 System Configuration SCSI Disk Utilities SCSI Disk Utilities scans a device connected to the selected channel and displays information on the device If the device is a hard disk drive you can perform low level formatting or verification When you choose SCSI Disk Utilities in the Options menu which is shown after selecting a channel to be configured the screen for scanning SCSI IDs is displayed No device No device No device No device No device No device No device Adaptec AIC 7902 No device No device No device No device No device No device No device No device When you select a device on this screen and press the Enter key details of the device is shown If the selected device is a hard disk drive you can execute the following submenus Format Disk performs low level
276. rom a power outlet Remove all the cables from the server Remove all the mounted modules Remove the backplane and the rails from the rack cabinet NO Carry backplane rails and modules separately 8 Protect the server with the shock absorbing materials and pack it securely IMPORTANT Check and adjust the system clock before operating the server again after relocating or storing it If the server and the built in optional devices are moved from a cold place to a warm place in a short time condensation will occur and cause malfunctions and breakdown when these are used in such state When you start operating these equipments again after the transportation or the storage make sure to wait for a sufficient period of time to use them in the operating environment If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by though the system clock adjustment is performed contact your sales agent 6 14 Maintenance This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 7 Troubleshooting If the product does not work properly see this chapter before deciding that it is a breakdown 7 2 Troubleshooting TO LOCATE THE ERRORS Use NEC ESMPRO to monitor the occurrence of fault during the system operation Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the management PC Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window Data Viewer or Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Man
277. ront bezel Management Utilities W NEC ESMPRO W NEC DianaScope Ready to use W Quick cableless connection hard disk CPU IO module POWER Fault tolerant Feature W Redundant modules achieved within a system W Higher hardware availability by isolation of failed module Various Features W Graphic accelerator ES1000 supported W El Torito Bootable CD ROM no emulation mode format supported W POWER switch mask W Remote power on feature W AC LINK feature Self diagnosis W Power On Self Test POST W Test and Diagnosis T amp D Utility Maintainability W Off line Maintenance Utility Easy and Fine Setup m NEC EXPRESSBUILDER system setup utility W SETUP BIOS setup utility W SCSISelect SCSI device utility General Description 2 3 The NEC Express5800 ft series achieves fault tolerant high availability in a space saving form factor by incorporating redundant hardware module pairs in a single chassis These modules work in synchronous tight lockstep while constantly making comparisons with each other and detecting anomalous diversions in operation Mirrored Compare Sync m Aud New fault tolerant technology Standard product Even if one hardware module stops the server can continue operation with the other module After the failed module is replaced the new module will obtain information from the other and resume operation NEC Express5800 ft series is a highly fault tolerant server th
278. ror disk components see the Mirror tree To view information on Mirror tree select Mirror under ft tree You can see the redundancy status of the mirrors and the device IDs of the SCSI slots into which these hard disk components are connected Be Gk ye Ion tee Manos amp j lt gt ola emi lr s m riz vel B ERR I EERO SERVER It Module t Model a Bl sce trao zm Mea Situs Hard Deka 1 Neal AAD 41 20 upes 2 Nona 4 Dugieq 41 4 upien 3 Komal AVI Duplex 41 50 utes lh Fox Help press Ft Tees wee rw Mirror Installing and Using Utilities 5 33 Monitoring Hard Disk To monitor the hard disks and detect disk failures at an early stage use the NEC ESMPRO Manager and Agent You can see configurations and information of hard disk in the Data Viewer Monitoring Operations This section describes how to maintain hard disks 1 Confirmation of hard disk failure If NEC ESMPRO Agent detects some problem with a hard disk it will report an alert of the problem to NEC ESMPRO Manager Check the alert viewer in the manager regularly Ex If a hard disk in SCSI Slot 41 1 is broken agent reports the following alert Status of the SCSI Slot ID 41 1 has changed from Duplex to Broken And manager displays the problem information of the hard disk in the ft gt SCSI enclosure SCSI Slot General of the data viewer Status EH Bicker
279. rror LED See page 2 25 Memory group 2 error LED See page 2 25 Voltage error LED See page 2 26 Memory group 1 error LED See page 2 25 HCS2 error LED See page 2 26 Power supply unit error LED See page 2 26 2 10 General Description 27 HCSI error LED See page 2 26 28 Heat warning LED See page 2 26 29 Backup device bays These bays are used to install optional drives such as DAT or AIT drives General Description 2 11 o o 3 o o QO o 9 4 000000000000000000009 rj i j9o9o959695969o9o9o09o0 E ee OSSEA i 6 PN NOOO ff ASALA OSOSOOSOST ON Jg hooo000000000902g foogogogogogogogogogogogogo Ww lel 7 t 3999990969996909g fP090909090999090990909090909 12 LJ 8 UJ 1 Q 3 4 5 5 6 124949 O GC CO C3 C5 C9 Co C CO Rack model with the front door open POWER LED green This LED illuminates when the power supply is switched on see page 2 22 DISK ACCESS LED green amber This LED illuminates in green when the internal hard disk drives are accessed If any internal hard disk drive is failing the LED illuminates in amber see page 2 22 FT status LED green amber This LED indicates the status of the server see page 2 23 In the Duplex mode the LED illuminates in green In the Simplex mode the LED does not illuminate If either of the CPU IO modules fails the LED illuminates in amber While memory dump is being perfo
280. ruction to disconnect the CPU module The driver started to remove the CPU module The driver started disconnecting the CPU module The driver finished successfully to remove the CPU module The driver successfully disconnected the CPU module The server is operating normally The driver failed to remove the CPU module The driver was unsuccessful to remove the CPU module There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver started the fast re sync function of the CPU module The driver started performing fast re sync to the CPU module The driver finished successfully the fast re sync function of the CPU module The driver successfully performed fast re sync to the CPU module The server is operating normally 7 14 Troubleshooting Message Meaning Action The driver failed the fast resync function of the CPU module The driver was unsuccessful to perform fast re sync to the CPU module If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver accepted to change the priority of the CPU module The driver received an instruction to change the priority of the CPU module The driver started to change the priority of the CPU module The driver started changing the priority of the CPU module The driver finished to change the prio
281. s HTTP port settings for the BMC When you click Web Server on the left pane of the BMC configuration window the right pane shows the overall information of the web server settings BMC Settings User 1 80 Network SSL Enable Disable Disable WEE e SSL Port 443 of Alert Mail Login Attempt Interval 60 sec Login Attempts 10 times 1 Account Lock Interval 600 sec IMPORTANT B When you change the HTTP port number settings of SSL enable disable or SSL port number the current connection will be temporarily disconnected Close the window and exit and then log on again by entering the newly set port number in the browser B The logon page remaining on the browser is the page you accessed by using old web server settings You cannot use it to log on System Configuration 4 69 When you click the icon for editing L4 the window for editing appears as shown below s HTTP Port Number 80 a IIU RN SSL Enable Disable J Enable SSL Port Number 443 1 2 3 4 5 6 peus Attempt Interval 60 sec WEB Server Settings WEB Server l Login Attempts 10 times Lock Interval 600 sec OK Cancel Specify the HTTP port number Specify whether or not to enable SSL communication If you select the check box for enabling connection by HTTPS SSL enabled is enabled Clear the check
282. s automatically after you place the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER in the CD ROM drive A dialog box called Master Control Menv will appear For this dialog see Master Control Menu described later o r NEC EXPRESSBUILDER NEC Express5800 Series Mosler ConkolMens seu rm Cepit C copan NEC 5 4 Installing and Using Utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu is used for the setup of hardware and the setup and installation of OS Start Start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu following the procedure below 1 2 3 Turn on the powers of peripherals and the power of the server in this order Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the server After the CD ROM is inserted reset the system by pressing Ctrl Alt Delete or turn off the power and then on again to restart the server The system is activated from the CD ROM to start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER After the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is started the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu shown below appears Express Setup Performs various automatic setup operations including hardware s internal parameters and status settings and installation of the OS and various utilities automatically Select this setup method if hard disk drives are used in partitions different from those at purchase or if the OS is reinstalled Tools Starts each of the utilities stored in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER individually to allow t
283. s required Follow the steps below if you use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for installation When the OS of the management PC is Windows 1 Activate Windows on the PC on which you want to install Java2 Runtime Environment and set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM 2 By the auto startup function the master control menu of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER appears Click Software Setup and then NEC DianaScope and then run the installer of JRE which you find in the NEC DianaScope install menu When the OS of the management PC is Linux The JRE installer Linux is stored in the following directory of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM dianascope jre x For installing JRE log on as root user or obtain the root authority by the su command 1 Copy the JRE installer to any directory Below is an example of copying the installer from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to user local bin cp mnt cdrom dianascope jre x j2re 1 4 2 09 linux 1586 rpm bin usr local bin 2 Go to the directory where you copied the JRE installer Below is an example that the installer was copied to user local bin cd user local bin System Configuration 4 47 3 Extract the JRE installer j2re 1_4 2 09 linux 1586 rpm bin 4 Install JRE JRE will be installed in the directory of each JRE version under usr java rpm ivh j2re 1 4 2 09 linux 1586 rpm 5 Add an environment variable JAVA HOME Enter the directory name that you installed JRE For bash ex
284. s to make sure they achieve redundancy Amber One of the CPU IO Check the CPU IO module status LEDs to find the modules has a problem failing module and then report your sales agent which LED of the failing module is blinking Blinking in Memory dump is being Wait for memory dump to be completed amber performed 2 24 General Description CPU IO Module 0 Status LED CPU IO Module 1 Status LED These LEDs illuminate in green when this device is running successfully If a LED is off blinks in green or illuminates blinks in amber the device has a problem The table below shows indications of CPU IO module status LEDs their meanings and actions to be taken CPU IO status LED indications Description Action Green The CPU IO module is running successfully Blinking in green A number of errors that can be fixed by memory are occurring Although you can continue using the server it is recommended to contact your service agent The CPU IO module handle is not firmly fixed Check to see the CPU IO module is firmly loaded and then fasten the screws of the handle to fix the handle modules has a problem Not on Power supply is off POST is running Wait for a while the LED will illuminate in green and the mode will become Duplex shortly after POST A fatal hardware error has Contact your sales agent occurred Amber One of the CPU IO Check the CPU IO module status LED
285. s to find the failing module and then report your sales agent which LED of the failing module is blinking Detected a fatal temperature error Check if dust is accumulated on internal fans and confirm that the fan cables are connected firmly If the LED indication does not change contact your sales agent Detected a fatal voltage error Contact your sales agent Power supply has a problem Contact your sales agent Amber blinking Detected a temperature error to be warned Check if dust is accumulated on internal fans and confirm that the fan cables are connected firmly If the LED indication does not change contact your sales agent Detected a voltage error to be warned Contact your sales agent Detected a fan alarm Check if dust is accumulated on internal fans and confirm that the fan cables are connected firmly If the LED indication does not change contact your sales agent General Description 2 25 UID LED This LED blinks in blue by NEC ESMPRO Manager NEC DianaScope or remote management of WEB server functions to identify the targeted device for maintenance Use this LED when you have two or more of this device model on a single rack When you are finished with maintenance switch off the UID LED Module POWER LED This LED illuminates in green while the CPU IO module is powered on When the CPU IO module is not powered on this LED is off When the
286. se a failure of the CPU as well as the server m Before adding or removing a CPU power off the server and then remove the CPU IO module m Make sure to read ANTI STATIC MEASURES and PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE before starting installing or removing options CPU Cb 2 Standard CPU S o J CPU 2 ee etn CPU I s o 8 26 System Upgrade Installing CPU Model with Heat Sink Follow the steps below to mount a CPU Information provided here is for the 320Fa L and 320Fa LR models which have a heat sink installed 1 Shutdown OS The system turns off automatically 2 Unplug the power cords 3 Remove the CPU IO module referring to page 8 17 4 Remove the cable to remove the cooling fan unit 5 Check to be sure of the location of the CPU socket 6 Detach the socket cover on the CPU socket IMPORTANT Keep the socket cover T Lift the socket lever PA 2 IMPORTANT O gt Open the lever fully It can be opened 120 or more Dns System Upgrade 8 27 8 Place the CPU on the socket carefully Pin marks TIPS Pay attention to the orientation of the CPU The CPU and socket have pin marks to prevent misinsertion Check the pin marks of the CPU and the socket and insert the CPU correctly 9 After pressing the CPU softly against the socket close the lever to secure it 10 Remove the film of the
287. se of the heat When you dismount the heat sink turn it sideways lightly to make sure that it is not sticking to the CPU If it is sticking to the CPU and you remove it the CPU or the socket may be damaged SESS SINR posses X S RssSSss SS SESS SES S RSS After removing the heat sink and the CPU attach the socket cover on the CPU socket mount the cooling fan unit and then connect the cable Install the CPU IO module referring to page 8 19 Connect the power cords Press the POWER switch to power on the server Check POST to see if there is any error message If there is any error message write it down and see the error message list on page 7 4 8 30 System Upgrade Replacing CPU Follow the steps below to replace a failed CPU oix File Edt View Tools Help i Modulett amp ofa Slam F m ms Nel GE SERVER B1 ESMPRO CPUID 0 0 20 SERVER B1 ft Efl Modue o CPU Module ID 0 0 General re Type Original OEM Processor E Update Model Name Family 15 Model 4 Stepping 3 Ig Maintenance Thermal Reference E cu Level2 Cache Size en Core Information CPUCID 0 0 21 B one Max Frequency Botage Unknown PCI Module ID 0 10 High Voltage Tolerance 1 766 mV General P uci T e 1 228 mV Maintenance H PCI Slot 1D 0 10 0 PCI Slot 1D 0 10 1 Status M Online 18 83 PCI Slot D 0 10 2 CPU is Primary 18 88 PCI Slot 1D 0 10 3 18 88 PCI Slot D 0 10 4 18 8 PC
288. see ANTI STATIC MEASURES on page 8 3 m Make sure to read ANTI STATIC MEASURES on page 8 3 and PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE on page 8 4 before starting installing or removing options 8 32 System Upgrade Installing ft Remote Management Card Follow the procedures below and install ft Remote Management Card 1 Remove CPU IO module referring page 8 17 TIPS If PCI board is already installed to the CPU IO module remove the PCI board referring to page 8 37 2 Remove PCI rear bracket installed to the CPU IO module as a standard with two screws PCI rear bracket 3 Remove the blank cover for LAN connector of ft Remote Management Card Grab the top and bottom of the blank cover to unlock and remove it 4 Install ft Remote Management Card to PCI rear bracket with one screw ft Remote Management Card KB ZA Rina Mh Deer fall 0985 ee A Blank cover for LAN connector A e A D D d B P System Upgrade 8 33 5 Check the slot for ft Remote Management Card and remove the connector cap installed in the slot IMPORTANT Keep and store the removed connector cap with care 6 Insert ft Remote Management Card slowly against the connecting part to the slot board on the motherboard 7 Insert the connecting part of the card against the slot and secure it with two screws ESSA SOS X S SV8S uS IMPORTANT If you hav
289. server Failure to observe them could lead to malfunction or breakdown Perform installation in a place where the system can operate correctly For details see the separate volume User s Guide Setup Before turning off the power or ejecting a disk make sure that the access LED is off When you have just turned off the power wait at least 30 seconds before turning it on again Once you have turned on the server do not turn it off until the NEC logo appears on the screen Plug the attached cord in the outlet whose AC input voltage is 100V After plugging in the power cord do not turn on the power of the equipment for 30 seconds Before you move the equipment turn off the power and unplug the cord This server shall not assure reproduction of copy protect CDs using reproduction equipment if such disks do not comply with CD standards Clean the equipment regularly For procedures see Chapter 6 Regular cleaning is effective in preventing various types of trouble Lightning may cause voltage sag As a preventive measure it is recommended to use UPS uninterruptible power supply This equipment does not support the connection through an UPS serial port RS 232C or the control using PowerChutePlus Check and adjust the system clock before operation in the following conditions After transporting the equipment After storing the equipment After the equipment halt under the conditions which is out of the gurantee
290. setting of jumper switch for clearing CMOS of CPU IO 0 Remove the clips from the jumper pins 11 12 and place them on the jumper pins 1 2 on the CPU IO Module 1 4 Mount only the CPU IO Module 0 to the NEC Express5800 ft series see Installing CPU IO Module on page 8 19 5 Connect the power cord of the CPU IO module 0 and press the POWER switch to power on 6 When you see 8150 NVRAM Cleared By Jumper and Press F1 to resume F2 to Setup during POST after the startup press the POWER switch to power off and then disconnect the power cord from the outlet 4 40 System Configuration 10 11 12 13 14 15 Example Phoenix ServerBIOS 3 Release 6 0 Copyright 1985 2003 Phoenix Technologies Ltd All Rights Reserved GPJ1 HA XXXX X XXXXXXXXXX IGPJ BIOS Release X X Build Time XX XX XX XX XX XX 2x Intel R Xeon R CPU 3 60GHz 3072M System RAM Passed 2048K Cache SRAM Passed System BIOS shadowed Video BIOS shadowed IPMI Base Board Management Controller was detected Device ID XX Device Revision XX IPMI Version X X Firmware Revision XX XX Self Test Result XXXXH SMBIOS Initialize Passed System Monitoring Check Passed ERROR 8150 NVRAM Cleared By Jumper Press F1 to resume F2 to Setup By referring to Removing CPU IO Module on page 8 17 remove the CPU IO module 0 from the server Restore the previous CMOS clear jumper switch settings
291. sfully duplicated Installing and Using Utilities 5 51 but the link cable of a teamed LAN is connected to only one side of the modules or when a storage device connected by FC is connected to only one side of the modules Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager B Start B Stop Select the target component in the ft tree Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen Click the Bring Up button in the Maintenance screen for the target component A certain time is required for the start The start result can be confirmed by State on the target component screen The result of the start operation is reported by the server as an alert CHECK When starting a stopped IO module diagnostics of the CPU IO modules are automatically performed The IO module is started after the diagnostics Perform the procedure below before replacing a component 1 2 3 Select the target component in the ft tree Check the current state with the State display on the target component screen Click the Bring Down button in the Maintenance screen for the target component A certain time is required for the stop The stop result can be confirmed by State on the target component screen The result of the stop operation is reported by the server as an alert CHECK When stopping IO module check that the status of Ethernet is Duplex on NEC ESMPRO Manager Do not stop the IO module especia
292. some types of errors two syslogs may be registered for a single occurrence However in the case of NEC ESMPRO Manager one log is reported for one occurrence Such errors are as follows Temperature error Voltage error Thermal trip Maintenance related Functions When you want to use maintenance related functions contact your maintenance personnel CPU Information If you select CPU Module CPU in the FT tree of the data viewer unknown or incorrect information appears in some information items The CPU information can be viewed by selecting System CPU in the ESMPRO tree Module Diagnostics When you diagnose a PCI module IO module the CPU module of the same side will also be diagnosed Therefore the CPU module also needs to be stopped Status during Module Diagnostics While diagnosing a stopped module the module is no longer in the duplex mode and the CPU and the memory cannot be used However the status of CPU and DIMM displayed under CPU module in the FT tree on a Data Viewer becomes Online and the status color becomes green Change of Installation States of CPU and PCI IO Modules If you dynamically change the configuration of the CPU or PCI module IO module in the relevant system during review of the server information by using the data viewer the message prompting you to reconstruct the tree of the data viewer will appear If you click the Yes button the tree is reconstructed in
293. stem status is indicated as Unknown However this will not affect your system operation Bonding configuration displayed by NEC ESMPRO Manager NEC ESMPRO Manager displays ten bonds from bond0 to bond including unconfigured bonds 5 24 Installing and Using Utilities NEC ESMPRO Manager To monitor and manage a computer on which NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed with a management PC online use NEC ESMPRO Manager that is bundled with the product For detailed procedures of installation and setting see online documents or NEC ESMPRO Online Help TIPS Online documents provide cautions and information for using NEC ESMPRO Manager See NEC ESMPRO Manager User s Guide in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM Monitoring by Use of Data Viewer To monitor the state of the NEC Express5800 ft series on a management computer with installation of NEC ESMPRO Manager the data viewer is used If you click each of the modules and items to be checked sequentially on the tree view in the Windows Explorer format the data viewer indicates their states on the right side of the screen You can manage the status on a Web browser using Web component functions of NEC ESMPRO Manager For details see Help on Web Component This section describes the tree structure and displayed screens in the data viewer To make the data viewer indicate the state of each module and those of the components on it select the server to be monitored from NEC ESMPRO
294. sult with your sales agent When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration select System Information Management and then Save of the Off line Maintenance Utility to make a backup copy of the system information Cleaning Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape QO Observe the following instructions to use the server safely There are risks of death or serious personal injury See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1 e Do not disassemble repair or alter the server e Do not look into the CD ROM drive e Disconnect the power plug before cleaning the server Cleaning the NEC Express5800 ft series For daily cleaning wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth Follow the procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces IMPORTANT m To avoid altering the material and color of the server do not use volatile solvents such as thinner or benzene to clean the server m The power receptacle the cables the connectors on the rear panel of server and the inside of the server must be kept dry Do not moisten them with water Make sure that the server is powered off Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth Bo deg Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or warm water and squeeze it firmly Rub off stains on the serve
295. t see Step 3 Disable the Startup Monitoring Function Setting To enter into the kudzu setup mode and make settings while the OS is starting To change the boot mode to the interactive startup mode 7 28 Troubleshooting Note You can change the interactive startup mode by entering the message T when Press I to enter interactive startup appears during the OS startup When the system enters into the maintenance mode while the OS is starting Note The following message is displayed on the screen Give root password for maintenance or type Control D to continue For other cases that daemons and or drivers are not started successfully due to errors or other causes Note For configuration that the actual memory capacity and the disk capacity are large it is recommended to change the BIOS Setup from the default 10 minutes to an appropriate value It takes time to display the screen on the OS when 2 5GB or more memory is mounted Check the Cache Settings of the BIOS settings In the Processor Settings on the Main screen change the Cache Settings to Discrete This setting optimizes the visual display OS behavior is unstable O Have you modified kernel Confirm that no patch for general kernel is applied or that the kernel that has been installed for NEC Express5800 ft series 1s not modified IO module is not disconnected When you attempt to disconnect IO module while
296. t Slot 08 01 00 AIC 7902 B at Slot 08 01 01 The SCSI controller of the motherboard has two channels The channel A 08 01 00 shows the hard disk drive of ID0 ID1 and ID2 while the channel B 08 01 01 shows the hard disk drive of ID3 ID4 and ID5 When selection is made the Options menu appears 4 Select the Options menu and press the Enter key Options Configure View SCSI Controller Settings SCSI Disk Utilities If you want to make settings of the adapter selected channel or the SCSI device connected to the channel choose Configure View SCSI Controller Settings If you want to know or verity the format of hard disk drive or find the SCSI ID of the device connected to the channel select CSI Disk Utilities For more information see the following description To quit SCSISe ect press the Esc until you see the closing message If any changes have been made the massage asking you whether or not to save the changes is displayed Select Yes save the changes or No discard the changes 4 32 System Configuration Configure View SCSI Controller Settings When you select Configure View Host Adapter Settings in the Options menu the following screen appears Bus Interface Controller Controller Controller Termination i ions Boot Device Configuration SCSI Device Configuration Advanced Configuration Additional Opt Host RAID BIOS Information Interrupt IRQ Chann
297. t finish normally the server will reboot itself automatically At the time of reboot it will select the other CPU IO module and run POST or OS startup In this manner the server retries POST or OS startup with different combinations of CPU IO modules If POST does not finish normally with any combinations the server will stop with the state of DC OFF or Post end with an error message displayed While performing retries the server displays or registers the error types For details of error messages see Chapter 7 Troubleshooting POST Error Messages When the server detects an error during POST it will notify you of the occurrence in the following manners m Displays an error message on the display unit m Makes a beeping sound These notification methods are described in POST Error Messages Page 7 3 IMPORTANT Before you contact your sales agent write down the error messages and patterns of the beeping sound They will serve as helpful information at the time of maintenance 2 34 General Description CPU IO Module Status The CPU IO module 0 or 1 started first is managed as primary and the module started later is managed as secondary If one CPU IO module is disconnected because of the failure and others the other module becomes primary The CPU IO module to be started first is selected depending on the primary secondary status of modules when the server was shut down the last time The followi
298. tal accessories you wear ring bracelet or wristwatch before working with the server Handling of components Keep any component in an anti static bag until you actually install it to the server Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or parts To store or carry any component place it in an anti static bag 8 4 System Upgrade PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE Note the following when installing or replacing devices to improve the performance of NEC Express5800 ft series m With the NEC Express5800 ft series devices can be replaced during the continuous operation Take extreme care for electric shock and damage to the component due to short circuit m Optional devices cannot be installed or removed during continuous operation Normally shutdown the OS check that the server is powered off disconnect all power cords and interface cables from the server before installing or removing the optional devices m To remove the CPU or PCI module during the continuous operation disable the intended module place the module off line by using the Server Maintenance Utility of the NEC ESMPRO Agent or the NEC ESMPRO Manager from the management PC on the network After a new module is installed to the server enable the module using the Server Maintenance Utility or the NEC ESMPRO Manager TIPS The system 1s defaulted to automatically boot the module once installed For more information see Chapter 5
299. tdiskadm described later For details see the separate volume of User s Guide Setup Two hard disk drives which configure RAID 1 must have the same disk capacity Also two hard disk drives must have the same logical structure Perform operations for built in SCSI disks such as mounting a disk to devices md for RAID by software With the standard configuration at the time of shipment the boot disks are inserted to the Slot 0 and Slot 3 Linux Setup and Operation 3 3 REPLACING 3 5 INCH HARD DISK DRIVE Follow the procedure below to remove the failed hard disk If the hard disk fails it should be replaced with new device with the server powered on How to Locate Failed Disks This section describes a procedure to locate failed disks 1 Open Data Viewer from ESMPRO Manager If trouble occurs the color changes from green to red In this case you will notice that there is trouble with both the SCSI Enclosures ID 41 and ID 42 jak SONIC DataYiewer De Eat yew Ios teb For Melo press PA asume aia e m S oie vl Check the SCSI Enclosures ID 41 and ID 42 on the tree See the path information in General Information of SCSI Slot to locate a group of 3 5 inch hard disk drive bays that corresponds to each enclosure SONIC DataViewer De Ld Wem loh teo Bs I 1 SID Blasi sie ve R Gene Pale ES The table below shows the path information on Gro
300. ted application Invoke TIPS You can identify the new hard disk by DevicePathID ex 41 1 Installing and Using Utilities 5 37 When one hard disk with problem was disconnected SCSI slot changes the status to Warning Ee Edt yew Took tep For Help press FI Hilos Warne loeo SCSI Slot General IMPORTANT The status color of the SCSI slot differs depending on the connection of mirrored hard disks m If one of the mirrored disks was removed Warning m If both of the mirrored disks were removed Gray Also at this time the redundant status of mirrored disks is changed to Warning iojx Be Ldt Yew Jods hep 22 Mirror mi i sp eje 5 7 zio M Pp SERVERS ESVERO SERVER 81 Rt Lj Moduie40 Modules B SCSI Erdre F SCSI Endosure 10 41 Mme Stm HardDek Stanan 5 Hard Disks 1 Noms 41 0 Duples 41 3 Duples 2 Wamng 41 1 Emply 41 45mples 3 Nomad 4I Ducles 41 5 Duples Mirror 5 38 Installing and Using Utilities 3 Mounting a hard disk drive Mount a hard disk drive When a hard disk drive 1s inserted an alert report is sent and the information on a Data Viewer changed A hard disk drive is mounted and the SCSI slot status becomes Online xi General sume Report Status SCSI slot of built in HDD recovery From SERVER B1 mgr_SERVER B1 Address 192 168 0 137 Received Thursday Decem
301. the following to reduce stresses on your body Sit in a good posture Sit on your chair with your back straight If the desk height is appropriate you will slightly look down at the screen and your forearms will be parallel to the floor This good work posture can minimize muscle tension caused by sedentary work If you sit in a bad posture for example sit round shouldered or with you face too close to the display you may easily suffer fatigue or have your eyesight affected Adjust the installation angle of Display Most types of displays allow you to adjust the angle vertically and horizontally This adjustment is very important to prevent the reflection of light as well as to make the screen more comfortable to see Without this adjustment it is difficult to maintain a good work posture and may get tired soon Be sure to adjust the angle before using the display Adjust Brightness and Contrast Displays allow you to adjust brightness and contrast Optimum brightness and contrast vary depending on the individual age brightness of the room etc you need to make an adjustment accordingly If the screen is too bright or too dark it is bad for your eyes Adjust the installation angle of Keyboard Some types of keyboards allow you to adjust the angle If you adjust the angle to make the keyboard more comfortable to use you can greatly reduce stresses on your shoulders arms and fingers
302. the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive 6 10 Maintenance 10 Power off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle 11 Reconnect all the LAN cables that have been disconnected in Step 2 to the server 12 Plug the power cord This completes the system diagnostics Maintenance 6 11 OFF LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY The Off line Maintenance Utility is an OS independent maintenance program When you are unable to start the OS dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem the Off line Maintenance Utility can be used IMPORTANT m The Off line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your sales agent The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM and the Off line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility but do not attempt to use the utility by yourself Contact your sales agent and follow instructions m Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a client to the server Starting the Off line Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways NEC Express5800 ft series does not support the feature to start the Off line Maintenance Utility from the maintenance partition m From the CD ROM Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD ROM in the CD ROM drive and reboot the system After the menu is displayed on the screen select Tools Off line Maint
303. the POWER switch to power on the server Verify that POST displays no error message If POST displays an error message write it down and see the POST error message list on page 7 4 System Upgrade 8 23 Removing DIMM Follow the procedure below to remove the DIMM TIPS Unless at least two DIMMs are installed the server does not work B OD Shutdown OS The system turns off automatically Disconnect the power cords from the outlets Remove the CPU IO module referring to page 8 17 Open the lever on both ends of the target DIMM socket to unlock the DIMM Then remove the DIMM Mount the CPU IO module referring to page 8 19 Connect the power cords Press the POWER switch to power on the server Verify that POST displays no error message If POST displays an error message write it down and see the POST error message list on page 7 4 8 24 System Upgrade Replacing DIMM Follow the procedure below to replace a failed DIMM 1 Identify the failed DIMM using the Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager ck SONI Data iewer MEE Elle Edit view Tools Help SONI ESMPRO MIB E DIMM ID 070 SONI FTServer CPU Module ffl CPU Module ID 0 General Memory Type Unknown E Update Revision 65535 E Maintenance Serial Number Unknown aW ceu SPD Revision 0 E crucp o 20 MB CPU D 0 21 E ffl omm Clock Frequency Unknown Self Refresh Support Refresh Rat
304. the data viewer to reflect the change of the system configuration on the data viewer Clicking the No button does not cause the tree to be reconstructed in the data viewer If so the information in the data viewer may be different from the current system information because the change of the system configuration is not reflected on the data viewer Installing and Using Utilities 5 19 Status of Logical PCI Slots Because the I O hub and display controller on a PCI module IO module are logical PCI slot information PCI module IO module are not influenced by them Therefore the Status of PCI slot ID 0 10 102 and PCI slot ID 0 10 103 under PCI module ID 0 10 and the Status of PCI slot ID 1 11 102 and PCI slot ID 1 11 103 under PCI module ID 1 11 in the FT tree on a Data Viewer becomes Online and the status color becomes green Impact of Module Status Changes PCI modules IO modules SCSI adapters SCSI buses and modules under the SCSI enclosure have impact on each other For example when the Status item of a module changes to fault it may be caused by another module s error Therefore you need to check the status of the other modules based on alert information Status Color after Mounting a Hard Disk When creating a new mirror the status of the hard disk and its upper component SCSI enclosure will continue to change after you mount a hard disk until the mirror 1s completed The OS m
305. the information of DIMM on the CPU modules to be viewed Installing and Using Utilities 5 27 Monitoring IO Module To monitor the IO modules and the components on the IO modules refer to the PCI Module tree To see the information on the PCI Module tree select the target IO module from PCI Module in the ft tree You can see the following information on the IO modules and the components on the IO modules of the PCI Module tree This section describes the general information screens of the IO modules The components on the IO modules are described later m General Allows the configuration and other information of the IO modules to be viewed m Maintenance Allows the start stop MTBF information clear and diagnostics of the IO modules to be provided See Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series described later for the start stop and MTBF information clear of the IO modules wm ihe Ono HOOF tin ta oe Wave rrr 5 28 Installing and Using Utilities Monitoring PCI Slots and Devices on IO Module To monitor the PCI slots and devices on the IO modules see the PCI slot tree To see the information on the PCI slot tree select PCI Module PCI module containing PCI slot to be seen PCI slot of the ft tree You can see the following information on the PCI slot and the devices on the PCI slot in the PCI slot tree m General Allows the PCI slot configuration information to be
306. the module you want to stop Diagnose the stopped PCI module Start the module 5 64 Installing and Using Utilities Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility Main window CPU Module screen Firmware Update screen Even if you do not have the image data of firmware for update the firmware can be copied from the other module By starting the module the firmware will be updated automatically However when the Automatic firmware update property is disabled follow the steps below to update the firmware 1 Start the system using the module of the firmware copy source Check the status LEDs of the copy destination component for its current status If it is running stop it 2 Onthe Update screen of the target component select Firmware update 3 When the Firmware Update screen appears check Copy online BIOS image to offline and execute it Firmware is updated by copying the firmware on the online side to the offline side Installing and Using Utilities 5 65 Dump Collection To collect the dump file with NEC ESMPRO Manager use CPU Module Maintenance tree in the data viewer To collect the dump with the Server Maintenance Utility use the utility screen of the component IMPORTANT Collect dump only for the purpose of failure investigation m Collecting dump of inactive module The dump is acquired from the inactive CPU module Broken or Shot The dump can be collected only wh
307. the removed slot cover with care KA Expansion slot cover 4 Remove the connector cap installed in the slot in which the board is installed TIPS To install the PCI board make sure the shape of the board connector matches with the shape of the PCI board slot connector IMPORTANT Keep and store the removed connector cap with care System Upgrade 8 37 PCI board 5 Gently insert the slot on the board against the connecting part of the board 6 Insert the board for connecting part of the board to securely connect to the slot IMPORTANT If you have trouble installing the board remove the board once and install it again Be careful since the board gets damaged if you press it too hard T Install the PCI bracket and secure the board A4 E z 7 E SS 8 Install CPU IO module referring to the page 8 19 9 Turn ON the power by pressing the POWER switch of installed CPU IO module Removing PCI Board Removal of PCI board card follows the reverse procedure of the installation and installs the expansion slot cover 8 38 System Upgrade Replacing PCI Board Follow the procedure below to replace the failed PCI board 1 Check the PCI board LED and identify the failed PCI board When the PCI board is failed or incorrectly installed the three LEDs associated with the PCI board slot are being turned off Remove the CPU IO module referring to the page 8 17 Re
308. tized Initiate Wide Negotiation Enable Disconnection Send Start Unit Command BIOS Multiple LUN Suppo Include in BIOS Scan IMPORTANT You can make settings on a SCSI ID basis Before you make settings confirm the SCSI ID of your target device TIPS If you do not know the SCSI ID of the added option choose SCSI Disk Utilities in the Options menu After a while the screen showing SCSI IDs and matching devices appears For more information see SCSI Disk Utilities described later 4 34 System Configuration The following table provides information on options and their functions on the menu Option Parameter Description Sync Transfer Rate 320 33 3 Typically set 320 This value may need to be MB Sec 160 20 0 changed depending on the option connected For 80 0 10 0 more information see the manual attached to the 66 6 ASYN option 40 0 Packetized Yes Select whether or not to optimize the bus usage No ratio by using the function to transfer packetized data DT or dual transition QAS Yes Select whether or not to use the Quick Arbitration No and Selection QAS function which improves the SCSI bus usage ratio Initiate Wide Negotiation Yes If the connected SCSI device supports Wide No SCSI select Yes If not select No Enable Disconnection Yes Set Yes No Send Start Unit Command Yes Set Yes for a hard disk dr
309. tly differs from the factory set value Check all setting values before restoring the default value System Configuration 4 29 Discard Changes Select this option if you want to restore previous values before saving values in CMOS When you select Discard Changes you will see the dialogue box as shown on the right If you select Yes in the dialogue box changes you have made are discarded and previous settings are restored Save Changes Select this option if you want to save changes you have made in CMOS non volatile memory without exiting SETUP When you select the Save Changes you will see the dialogue box as shown on the right If you select Yes in the dialogue box changes you have made are saved in CMOS non volatile memory Save configuration changes now m 4 30 System Configuration SCSI BIOS SCSISelect The SCSISelect utility makes settings of the SCSI controller on a motherboard You can start it up by simple key operation during POST execution without using any special startup disk IMPORTANT Because the server is installed with the latest version of the SCSISe ect utility your screen display may be different from the one described in this guide For information on options different from those described in this guide refer to the online help or ask your service agent Usage of the SCSISelect utility The SCSISe ect utility is activated when you c
310. ule The driver finished successfully to remove the Module The driver successfully disconnected the module The server is operating normally The driver failed to remove the Module The driver was unsuccessful to disconnect the module There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The driver accepted to update the BIOS The driver received an instruction to update BIOS The driver started to update the BIOS The driver started updating BIOS The driver finished successfully to update the BIOS The driver successfully updated BIOS The server is operating normally The driver failed to update the BIOS The driver was unsuccessful to update BIOS The error occurred on the South Bridge There was a South Bridge error There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent FT nonfatal error occurrred NEC GeminiEngine HA System Controller detected an error The error occurred on the CPU module There was a CPU module error If the message is recorded frequently there may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent The error occurred on the PCI Express There was a PCI Express error The driver detected that the Module was not working A module error was detected There may be problem in the hardware environment Contact your sales agent DMA error occurred
311. update NEC ESMPRO Agent Server Maintenance Utility NEC ESMPRO Manager data viewer BMC F W update NEC ESMPRO Agent BMC F W update utility Confirmation of alert or confirmation of fault occurrence event information syslog NEC ESMPRO Manager Alert Viewer Confirmation of H W error log NEC ESMPRO Agent The report of a fault occurrence in the NEC Express5800 ft series alert is immediately sent to the NEC ESMPRO Manager When the NEC ESMPRO Manager receives the alert a popup message appears The alert contains the detailed information of the fault and the proper countermeasures You can take the appropriate action for the alert 5 14 Installing and Using Utilities G STRATUS MSG STATE REMOVH From TUNE 3038 mgr_TUNE 3038 T Do not display a further notification message General SNMP Report Status sa AlertViewer led STRATUS MSG STATE REMOVED File Edit View Tools Help From TUNE 3038 mgr_TUNE 3038 Address 140 0 0 38 2g x E al l Received Tuesday July 03 2001 03 22 PM Severity An Component fan Generated Tuesday July 03 2001 03 22 PM pour time IS mgr TUNE 140 0 0 0 ISISTRATUS MSG STATE SIMPLEX FT Server mor TUNE Nate 140 0 0 38 071031200 system Configuration Changed t Server Recovery mgr TUNE 140 0 0 38 07 03 200 3 Items 2 Unread Collective Management of Distributed Servers T
312. ups 1 and 2 Slot PCI module SCSI adapter SCSI bus Group1 10 5 0 Group2 11 5 0 3 4 Linux Setup and Operation 3 See the path information in General Information of SCSI Slot ID 41 1 It shows that PCI module SCSI adapter and SCSI bus are 10 5 and 0 respectively SCSI Bus 1 10 5 0 This allows you to find that SCSI Slot ID 41 1 belongs to Group 1 SCSI slots under SCSI Enclosure ID 41 correspond to Group 1 Therefore Group 2 corresponds to SCSI slots under SCSI Enclosure ID 42 You will find that the failed disk located in the SCSI slot ID 41 2 is the second disk of Group 1 Linux Setup and Operation 3 5 Restoring Redundant Configuration Manually This section describes procedure to change the built in disk on which failures occurred and re establish the dual configuration of hard disks IMPORTANT m Manual restoration of redundant configuration must be performed by a root user m While recovery operation of RAID the status of two disks configuring RAID become resync or recovery to build RAID for a while Do not stop or restart the system until that status is finished m Before recovering the boot disks Slot0 and Slot3 from the system remove the registration of the disk device that diskdump uses and then register them again after the boot disks are recovered Referring to DUMP INITIALIZATION check the diskdump partition remove the registration
313. uration Date Yes data will be cleared at next boot with this option set automatically to No NumLock On Specify whether or not to enable NumLock Off at system startup Factory set System Configuration 4 13 Memory Configuration When you select Memory Configuration in the Advanced menu the following screen appears Fi Help TL Select Item J Change Values Esc Exit 5 Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu Refer to the table below for information on options Option Parameter Description Memory Size Displays the memory size DIMM Group 1 Status Normal Displays the memory status Not Installed DIMM Group 2 Status Normal Displays the memory status Not Installed DIMM Group 3 Status Normal Displays the memory status Not Installed Extended RAM Step 1MB Set the time interval between memory tests 1KB Depending on the mounted memory Every location amount it may take about several tens of Disabled minutes to several hours to complete the test Set Disabled for normal operation Factory set 4 14 System Configuration PCI Configuration When you select PCI Configuration in the Advanced menu the following screen appears If you select a menu with the PB mark and press Enter its submenu appears Refer to the table below for information on options Option Parameter Description PCI Slot 1 Option ROM Enabled If Enab
314. uted by Advanced Remote GA Management Publisher authenticity verified by NEC Corporation A The security certificate was issued by a company that is not trusted 6 Ji The security certificate has not expired and is still valid Caution Advanced Remote Management asserts that this content is safe You should only accept this content if you trust Advanced Remote Management to make that assertion More Details No Away System Configuration 4 51 TIPS If you use SSL for access the Warning Security dialogue box es for server certification may be displayed for SSL in addition to the dialogue box shown above Logon and logout Logon When the logon page appears enter the user name and password and then click Login When you login for the first time use the following default user name and password Default user name administrator Default password None enter no data IMPORTANT By default no password is set Set your password immediately after logging on For security it is recommended to change the default user name as well For information on settings and modification see BMC Configuration described later When the password is authenticated the following end user license agreement is displayed End User License Agreement End User License Agreement NEC Software License Agreement 1 License NEC Corporation hereinafter referred to as NEC grants
315. ver Motherboard resource Motherboard resource Motherboard resource Motherboard resource Motherboard resource Motherboard resource ISAPNP read data port Motherboard resource PCI configuration Motherboard resource N8800 090F EXP320B NEC Express5800 320Fa L N8800 091F EXP320A NEC Express5800 320Fa LR User s Guide 2nd Edition 9 2006 856 126408 101 01
316. ver cannot connect to network at the same time without changing the IP address To connect to network simultaneously specify different IP addresses To ensure security change values for host name password and IP address according to your network environment Settings on the Server The following describes the settings that should be made on the server to use the server CHECK The resolution and refresh rate of the screen that can be displayed on a remote KVM console are 1024x768 and 75Hz or smaller respectively If values larger than these are set the remote screen does not display any data If a great value is set for the number of colors on the screen for the server the remote may not show colors accurately Connecting this card to a network where broadcast occurs frequently may affect remote control performance System Configuration 4 45 1 Initial Settings on the Server If information specific to the server has not been written in the following message informing you that the server specific information is not written is displayed while the NEC logo is displayed and the startup processing of the server is paused If this message is not displayed the remote management function does not need to be initialized If it is displayed the remote management function needs to be initialized in order to monitor devices into details H W Configuration of BMC is corrupted Update BMC H W Configuration by configuration
317. vice specific information CPU O Function to display physical information of CPU System Function to view logical information or monitor load rate of CPU O Function to view logical information or monitor status of memory I O device Function to view information of I O devices floppy disk drive serial port parallel port keyboard mouse and video O System environment Function to monitor temperature fan voltage power door etc Temperature Function to monitor the temperature inside the cabinet Fan Function to monitor fan Voltage Function to monitor the voltage inside the cabinet x oO OC o gt Power Function to monitor power unit Door Function to monitor the Chassis Intrusion open close of the cover door on the cabinet x Software Function to view information of service driver OS Network Function to view information about network LAN and monitor packets Extension device Function to view information of extension bus device BIOS Function to view BIOS information ologo olo Local polling Function to monitor any MIB item value which the agents get 5 12 Installing and Using Utilities Function name Supported Function description Storage x Function to monitor storage devices e g hard disk drive and controller File system Function to view file system configuration and monitor usage rate Disk array x
318. viewed CHECK The status of the following PCI slots is always Online ID 0 10 102 0 10 103 1 11 102 1 11 103 EE Pile ps Be OR Yew Io t LLL amp j lt gt Sa vel Ti peed Weng MN Reon m Maintenance Allows a device on the PCI slot to be started This function is not supported in the current version EE c lm De t wee lods bb oua 0 b la ail Fa wl E rn Up Demand ler teme egi ed af Tor Help press Fi C eed Were Ml eror Installing and Using Utilities 5 29 m PCI Device General Allows the information of devices on the PCI slot to be viewed m PCI Device Detailed information Allows the detailed information of a device on the PCI slot to be viewed 5 30 Installing and Using Utilities Monitoring BMC on IO Module To monitor the base management controller BMC controller for system management on the IO modules see the BMC tree To see the information on the BMC tree select PCI Module PCI module containing BMC to be seen BMC of the ft tree You can see the BMC s firmware version and other information in the BMC tree of SERVIR B1 Data fiewer nig od Be p yew gois bp T Modulet amp j Sia ejm eR zi el Ey svo Treo LES Hod dead S B urosa therret Boor KID 0 10 10 Porto Ethernet Boord ID 010 105 Port a oserl scs toon Meer Fer Help press F
319. when the power supply to the server restarts Parameter Stats DREOG paweled on Stay Off Last State Power On In service Off On On Out of service DC power Off Off Off On Forced shutdown Off Off On Pressing the POWER switch for over four seconds shuts down the power to the server System Management Select System Management on the Server menu and press Enter to display the following screen Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility Way BIOS Revision Board Part Board Serial System Part System Serial amp Chassis Part Chassis Serial BMC Device ID BMC Device Rev BMC Firmware Rev SDR Rex PIA Rev Modules BMC MAC Address TL Select Item lt Select Menu Fl Help Esc Exit GP J1 HA 000 5 B 0509162344 856 123456 123456789 012 N81 00 667 123456789 0 FTsystem 01 24 01 00 02 SDR Version00 F4 01 F3 00 30 13 B8 87 19 Change Values Enter Select gt Sub Menu All items on this menu cannot be modi fied in usermode Ifany items require changes please consult your system Su previsor F9 Setup De faults F10 Save and Exit See the table below for setup options on the screen Option Parameter Description BIOS Revision Displays the BIOS revision Board Part Number Displays the board information Board Serial Number Displays the board information System Part Number Displays the system information
320. you a personal and non exclusive license to use the provided software the Software only on one machine at any one time and only in the country where you acquired the Software The Software is in use on a machine when it is loaded into temporary memory i e RAM or installed into permanent me mory i e hard disk or other storage device of that machine You obtain no license other than those expressly granted you under this Agreement 2 Period 1 You may terminate the license granted hereunder by notifying us in writing at least one month prior to the desired termination date 2 NEC may terminate the license granted you hereunder at anytime if you fail to comply with any terms and conditions of this Agreement 4 Do you agree above agreement L 4 Read the agreement carefully If you can agree click Yes and you can start using remote management functions If you cannot agree click No You cannot use remote management functions TIPS If you click Yes you do not see this message again because the data will be stored on the management PC 4 52 System Configuration Logout Click the File menu and select Exit to logout When you log out the main window closes and you will return to the login page on the browser System Configuration 4 53 Main Window 1 Click this to show the File menu Click Exit to quit this applet 2 Click this to show the Window menu
321. you can only boot the system in the simplex mode insert a boot disk into the Slot0 and boot the system IMPORTANT Never use the command that directly deletes SCSI disk for separating a SCSI disk If you do RAID cannot be recovered when the deleted SCSI disk is included in the md device 3 10 Linux Setup and Operation SETTING THE VIDEO MODE This section describes how to configure the video mode on the server The server needs to be restarted in order to enable the video mode setting 1 Log on with the root authority and open boot grub grub conf with an editor IMPORTANT grub conf is an extremely imporatant file for the system In the worst case you may not be able to start the system Pay extra attention when editing the file 2 Change the following setting within grub conf The information such as the kernel version 2 6 9 34 17AXsmp is just an example Change these values to the actual values of your environment title Asianux HAS 2 6 9 34 17AXsmp root hd0 0 kernel vmlinuz 2 6 9 34 17AXsmp ro root dev md1 vga 0x323 video vesafb off 1 initrd initrd 2 6 9 34 17AXsmp HAS img 1 vga 0x323 0x323 is an option Configure the video mode common to the console and X server Specify an appropriate value from the table below Value Screen size Color 0x317 1024 x 768 16bpp 0x318 1024 x 768 24bpp 0x323 1024 x 768 32bpp 0x314 800 x 600 16bpp 0x315 80
322. you want to remove To this end use the Server Maintenance Utility of the NEC ESMPRO Agent installed to your server or the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager For the detailed procedure see Maintenance of NEC Express5800 ft series of NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager in Chapter 5 273287347 J amp j 41 oa Simi Po SIX wl Additonal nian 4433038000030 Stan meret update I ead RE caper Pasa The primary module i etched dung Smich Dono Sas Save memory dump of Pe stepped mode Harve memory dung of the ouvert Wnien riho sopping Hever rec pv rore zl AO suit I I Liu NEC ESMPRO Manager Server Maintenance Utility Select ft CPU Module CPU Module to be Select FTServer CPU Module CPU Module to removed Maintenance Bring Up Bring Down be removed Bring Up Bring Down Down Bring Down Repeat the operation mentioned above for the IO module and confirm that the status of the CPU IO module and the IO module are Removed 2 Ifthe module POWER LED of the module to be removed is illuminated press the module POWER switch to power off the module 3 Ifyou are using the tower model Unlock the front door lock with the security key to open the front door lt If you are using the rack model Unlock the front bezel with the security key and detach it 8 18 System Upgrade 4 Loosen the screws securing the CPU IO module handle to press down the
323. ystem usage rate etc LAN e Line fault threshold over e Send retry or send abort threshold over etc Prevention of Server Fault NEC ESMPRO Agent includes the preventive maintenance function forecasting the occurrence of a fault as countermeasures for preventing faults from occurring NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent can set the threshold for each source in the server If the value of a source exceeds the threshold NEC ESMPRO Agent reports the alert to NEC ESMPRO Manager The preventive maintenance function can be set for a variety of monitoring items including cabinet temperature and CPU usage rate Installing and Using Utilities 5 11 Management of Server Operation Status NEC ESMPRO Agent manages and monitors a variety of components installed in the server You can view the information managed and monitored by NEC ESMPRO Agent on the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager NEC ESMPRO Agent also manages and monitors all the components and conditions required to keep the server reliability at a high level such as hard disks CPU memory fans power supply and temperature Below is a list of functions of data viewer s items and their availability if NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed Function name Supported Function description Hardware O Function to display physical information of hardware Memory bank Function to display physical information of memory Information O Device O Function to display de

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Fixapart AC-043  GUIDE PRATIQUE POUR LA SODEXO CARD®  Massive Wall light 54000/17/10    T-7 Imágenes térmicas Gafas / Binoculares de infrarrojo    Sony VAIO VGNA200 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file